blob: 5296100f3889920ad92b333a0b6652eac9dc96e2 [file] [log] [blame]
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001/*
Johannes Berg3017b802007-08-28 17:01:53 -04002 * mac80211 <-> driver interface
3 *
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004 * Copyright 2002-2005, Devicescape Software, Inc.
5 * Copyright 2006-2007 Jiri Benc <jbenc@suse.cz>
Jouni Malinen026331c2010-02-15 12:53:10 +02006 * Copyright 2007-2010 Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net>
Johannes Bergd98ad832014-09-03 15:24:57 +03007 * Copyright 2013-2014 Intel Mobile Communications GmbH
Sara Sharon06470f72016-01-28 16:19:25 +02008 * Copyright (C) 2015 - 2016 Intel Deutschland GmbH
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07009 *
10 * This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
11 * it under the terms of the GNU General Public License version 2 as
12 * published by the Free Software Foundation.
13 */
14
15#ifndef MAC80211_H
16#define MAC80211_H
17
Paul Gortmaker187f1882011-11-23 20:12:59 -050018#include <linux/bug.h>
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -070019#include <linux/kernel.h>
20#include <linux/if_ether.h>
21#include <linux/skbuff.h>
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -070022#include <linux/ieee80211.h>
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -070023#include <net/cfg80211.h>
Michal Kazior5caa3282016-05-19 10:37:51 +020024#include <net/codel.h>
Johannes Berg42d98792011-07-07 18:58:01 +020025#include <asm/unaligned.h>
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -070026
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -040027/**
28 * DOC: Introduction
29 *
30 * mac80211 is the Linux stack for 802.11 hardware that implements
31 * only partial functionality in hard- or firmware. This document
32 * defines the interface between mac80211 and low-level hardware
33 * drivers.
34 */
35
36/**
37 * DOC: Calling mac80211 from interrupts
38 *
39 * Only ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() can be
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -070040 * called in hardware interrupt context. The low-level driver must not call any
41 * other functions in hardware interrupt context. If there is a need for such
42 * call, the low-level driver should first ACK the interrupt and perform the
Johannes Berg2485f712008-02-25 16:27:41 +010043 * IEEE 802.11 code call after this, e.g. from a scheduled workqueue or even
44 * tasklet function.
45 *
46 * NOTE: If the driver opts to use the _irqsafe() functions, it may not also
Randy Dunlap6ef307b2008-07-03 13:52:18 -070047 * use the non-IRQ-safe functions!
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -070048 */
49
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -040050/**
51 * DOC: Warning
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -070052 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -040053 * If you're reading this document and not the header file itself, it will
54 * be incomplete because not all documentation has been converted yet.
55 */
56
57/**
58 * DOC: Frame format
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -070059 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -040060 * As a general rule, when frames are passed between mac80211 and the driver,
61 * they start with the IEEE 802.11 header and include the same octets that are
62 * sent over the air except for the FCS which should be calculated by the
63 * hardware.
64 *
65 * There are, however, various exceptions to this rule for advanced features:
66 *
67 * The first exception is for hardware encryption and decryption offload
68 * where the IV/ICV may or may not be generated in hardware.
69 *
70 * Secondly, when the hardware handles fragmentation, the frame handed to
71 * the driver from mac80211 is the MSDU, not the MPDU.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -070072 */
73
Ron Rindjunsky10816d42007-11-26 16:14:30 +020074/**
Luis R. Rodriguez42935ec2009-07-29 20:08:07 -040075 * DOC: mac80211 workqueue
76 *
77 * mac80211 provides its own workqueue for drivers and internal mac80211 use.
78 * The workqueue is a single threaded workqueue and can only be accessed by
79 * helpers for sanity checking. Drivers must ensure all work added onto the
80 * mac80211 workqueue should be cancelled on the driver stop() callback.
81 *
82 * mac80211 will flushed the workqueue upon interface removal and during
83 * suspend.
84 *
85 * All work performed on the mac80211 workqueue must not acquire the RTNL lock.
86 *
87 */
88
Felix Fietkauba8c3d62015-03-27 21:30:37 +010089/**
90 * DOC: mac80211 software tx queueing
91 *
92 * mac80211 provides an optional intermediate queueing implementation designed
93 * to allow the driver to keep hardware queues short and provide some fairness
94 * between different stations/interfaces.
95 * In this model, the driver pulls data frames from the mac80211 queue instead
96 * of letting mac80211 push them via drv_tx().
97 * Other frames (e.g. control or management) are still pushed using drv_tx().
98 *
99 * Drivers indicate that they use this model by implementing the .wake_tx_queue
100 * driver operation.
101 *
102 * Intermediate queues (struct ieee80211_txq) are kept per-sta per-tid, with a
103 * single per-vif queue for multicast data frames.
104 *
105 * The driver is expected to initialize its private per-queue data for stations
106 * and interfaces in the .add_interface and .sta_add ops.
107 *
108 * The driver can't access the queue directly. To dequeue a frame, it calls
109 * ieee80211_tx_dequeue(). Whenever mac80211 adds a new frame to a queue, it
110 * calls the .wake_tx_queue driver op.
111 *
112 * For AP powersave TIM handling, the driver only needs to indicate if it has
113 * buffered packets in the driver specific data structures by calling
114 * ieee80211_sta_set_buffered(). For frames buffered in the ieee80211_txq
115 * struct, mac80211 sets the appropriate TIM PVB bits and calls
116 * .release_buffered_frames().
117 * In that callback the driver is therefore expected to release its own
118 * buffered frames and afterwards also frames from the ieee80211_txq (obtained
119 * via the usual ieee80211_tx_dequeue).
120 */
121
Paul Gortmaker313162d2012-01-30 11:46:54 -0500122struct device;
123
Luis R. Rodriguez42935ec2009-07-29 20:08:07 -0400124/**
Johannes Berge100bb62008-04-30 18:51:21 +0200125 * enum ieee80211_max_queues - maximum number of queues
126 *
127 * @IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUES: Maximum number of regular device queues.
Johannes Berg445ea4e2013-02-13 12:25:28 +0100128 * @IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUE_MAP: bitmap with maximum queues set
Johannes Berge100bb62008-04-30 18:51:21 +0200129 */
130enum ieee80211_max_queues {
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +0200131 IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUES = 16,
Johannes Berg445ea4e2013-02-13 12:25:28 +0100132 IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUE_MAP = BIT(IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUES) - 1,
Johannes Berge100bb62008-04-30 18:51:21 +0200133};
134
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +0200135#define IEEE80211_INVAL_HW_QUEUE 0xff
136
Johannes Berge100bb62008-04-30 18:51:21 +0200137/**
Johannes Berg4bce22b2010-11-16 11:49:58 -0800138 * enum ieee80211_ac_numbers - AC numbers as used in mac80211
139 * @IEEE80211_AC_VO: voice
140 * @IEEE80211_AC_VI: video
141 * @IEEE80211_AC_BE: best effort
142 * @IEEE80211_AC_BK: background
143 */
144enum ieee80211_ac_numbers {
145 IEEE80211_AC_VO = 0,
146 IEEE80211_AC_VI = 1,
147 IEEE80211_AC_BE = 2,
148 IEEE80211_AC_BK = 3,
149};
Johannes Berg948d8872011-09-29 16:04:29 +0200150#define IEEE80211_NUM_ACS 4
Johannes Berg4bce22b2010-11-16 11:49:58 -0800151
152/**
Johannes Berg6b301cd2007-09-18 17:29:20 -0400153 * struct ieee80211_tx_queue_params - transmit queue configuration
154 *
155 * The information provided in this structure is required for QoS
Johannes Berg3330d7b2008-02-10 16:49:38 +0100156 * transmit queue configuration. Cf. IEEE 802.11 7.3.2.29.
Johannes Berg6b301cd2007-09-18 17:29:20 -0400157 *
Bob Copelande37d4df2008-10-20 21:20:27 -0400158 * @aifs: arbitration interframe space [0..255]
Johannes Bergf434b2d2008-07-10 11:22:31 +0200159 * @cw_min: minimum contention window [a value of the form
160 * 2^n-1 in the range 1..32767]
Johannes Berg6b301cd2007-09-18 17:29:20 -0400161 * @cw_max: maximum contention window [like @cw_min]
Johannes Berg3330d7b2008-02-10 16:49:38 +0100162 * @txop: maximum burst time in units of 32 usecs, 0 meaning disabled
Alexander Bondar908f8d02013-04-07 09:53:30 +0300163 * @acm: is mandatory admission control required for the access category
Kalle Valo9d173fc2010-01-14 13:09:14 +0200164 * @uapsd: is U-APSD mode enabled for the queue
Johannes Berg6b301cd2007-09-18 17:29:20 -0400165 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -0700166struct ieee80211_tx_queue_params {
Johannes Bergf434b2d2008-07-10 11:22:31 +0200167 u16 txop;
Johannes Berg3330d7b2008-02-10 16:49:38 +0100168 u16 cw_min;
169 u16 cw_max;
Johannes Bergf434b2d2008-07-10 11:22:31 +0200170 u8 aifs;
Alexander Bondar908f8d02013-04-07 09:53:30 +0300171 bool acm;
Kalle Valoab133152010-01-12 10:42:31 +0200172 bool uapsd;
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -0700173};
174
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -0700175struct ieee80211_low_level_stats {
176 unsigned int dot11ACKFailureCount;
177 unsigned int dot11RTSFailureCount;
178 unsigned int dot11FCSErrorCount;
179 unsigned int dot11RTSSuccessCount;
180};
181
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100182/**
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +0200183 * enum ieee80211_chanctx_change - change flag for channel context
Johannes Berg4bf88532012-11-09 11:39:59 +0100184 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_WIDTH: The channel width changed
Johannes Berg04ecd252012-09-11 14:34:12 +0200185 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RX_CHAINS: The number of RX chains changed
Simon Wunderlich164eb022013-02-08 18:16:20 +0100186 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RADAR: radar detection flag changed
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +0200187 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_CHANNEL: switched to another operating channel,
188 * this is used only with channel switching with CSA
Eliad Peller21f659b2013-11-11 20:14:01 +0200189 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_MIN_WIDTH: The min required channel width changed
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +0200190 */
191enum ieee80211_chanctx_change {
Johannes Berg4bf88532012-11-09 11:39:59 +0100192 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_WIDTH = BIT(0),
Johannes Berg04ecd252012-09-11 14:34:12 +0200193 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RX_CHAINS = BIT(1),
Simon Wunderlich164eb022013-02-08 18:16:20 +0100194 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RADAR = BIT(2),
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +0200195 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_CHANNEL = BIT(3),
Eliad Peller21f659b2013-11-11 20:14:01 +0200196 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_MIN_WIDTH = BIT(4),
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +0200197};
198
199/**
200 * struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf - channel context that vifs may be tuned to
201 *
202 * This is the driver-visible part. The ieee80211_chanctx
203 * that contains it is visible in mac80211 only.
204 *
Johannes Berg4bf88532012-11-09 11:39:59 +0100205 * @def: the channel definition
Eliad Peller21f659b2013-11-11 20:14:01 +0200206 * @min_def: the minimum channel definition currently required.
Johannes Berg04ecd252012-09-11 14:34:12 +0200207 * @rx_chains_static: The number of RX chains that must always be
208 * active on the channel to receive MIMO transmissions
209 * @rx_chains_dynamic: The number of RX chains that must be enabled
210 * after RTS/CTS handshake to receive SMPS MIMO transmissions;
Simon Wunderlich5d7fad42012-11-30 19:17:28 +0100211 * this will always be >= @rx_chains_static.
Simon Wunderlich164eb022013-02-08 18:16:20 +0100212 * @radar_enabled: whether radar detection is enabled on this channel.
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +0200213 * @drv_priv: data area for driver use, will always be aligned to
214 * sizeof(void *), size is determined in hw information.
215 */
216struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf {
Johannes Berg4bf88532012-11-09 11:39:59 +0100217 struct cfg80211_chan_def def;
Eliad Peller21f659b2013-11-11 20:14:01 +0200218 struct cfg80211_chan_def min_def;
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +0200219
Johannes Berg04ecd252012-09-11 14:34:12 +0200220 u8 rx_chains_static, rx_chains_dynamic;
221
Simon Wunderlich164eb022013-02-08 18:16:20 +0100222 bool radar_enabled;
223
Johannes Berg1c06ef92012-12-28 12:22:02 +0100224 u8 drv_priv[0] __aligned(sizeof(void *));
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +0200225};
226
227/**
Luciano Coelho1a5f0c12014-05-23 14:33:12 +0300228 * enum ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode - channel context switch mode
229 * @CHANCTX_SWMODE_REASSIGN_VIF: Both old and new contexts already
230 * exist (and will continue to exist), but the virtual interface
231 * needs to be switched from one to the other.
232 * @CHANCTX_SWMODE_SWAP_CONTEXTS: The old context exists but will stop
233 * to exist with this call, the new context doesn't exist but
234 * will be active after this call, the virtual interface switches
235 * from the old to the new (note that the driver may of course
236 * implement this as an on-the-fly chandef switch of the existing
237 * hardware context, but the mac80211 pointer for the old context
238 * will cease to exist and only the new one will later be used
239 * for changes/removal.)
240 */
241enum ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode {
242 CHANCTX_SWMODE_REASSIGN_VIF,
243 CHANCTX_SWMODE_SWAP_CONTEXTS,
244};
245
246/**
247 * struct ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch - vif chanctx switch information
248 *
249 * This is structure is used to pass information about a vif that
250 * needs to switch from one chanctx to another. The
251 * &ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode defines how the switch should be
252 * done.
253 *
254 * @vif: the vif that should be switched from old_ctx to new_ctx
255 * @old_ctx: the old context to which the vif was assigned
256 * @new_ctx: the new context to which the vif must be assigned
257 */
258struct ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch {
259 struct ieee80211_vif *vif;
260 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *old_ctx;
261 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *new_ctx;
262};
263
264/**
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100265 * enum ieee80211_bss_change - BSS change notification flags
266 *
267 * These flags are used with the bss_info_changed() callback
268 * to indicate which BSS parameter changed.
269 *
270 * @BSS_CHANGED_ASSOC: association status changed (associated/disassociated),
271 * also implies a change in the AID.
272 * @BSS_CHANGED_ERP_CTS_PROT: CTS protection changed
273 * @BSS_CHANGED_ERP_PREAMBLE: preamble changed
Jouni Malinen9f1ba902008-08-07 20:07:01 +0300274 * @BSS_CHANGED_ERP_SLOT: slot timing changed
Tomas Winkler38668c02008-03-28 16:33:32 -0700275 * @BSS_CHANGED_HT: 802.11n parameters changed
Johannes Berg96dd22a2008-09-11 00:01:57 +0200276 * @BSS_CHANGED_BASIC_RATES: Basic rateset changed
Johannes Berg57c4d7b2009-04-23 16:10:04 +0200277 * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INT: Beacon interval changed
Johannes Berg2d0ddec2009-04-23 16:13:26 +0200278 * @BSS_CHANGED_BSSID: BSSID changed, for whatever
279 * reason (IBSS and managed mode)
280 * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON: Beacon data changed, retrieve
281 * new beacon (beaconing modes)
282 * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_ENABLED: Beaconing should be
283 * enabled/disabled (beaconing modes)
Juuso Oikarinena97c13c2010-03-23 09:02:34 +0200284 * @BSS_CHANGED_CQM: Connection quality monitor config changed
Johannes Berg8fc214b2010-04-28 17:40:43 +0200285 * @BSS_CHANGED_IBSS: IBSS join status changed
Juuso Oikarinen68542962010-06-09 13:43:26 +0300286 * @BSS_CHANGED_ARP_FILTER: Hardware ARP filter address list or state changed.
Johannes Berg4ced3f72010-07-19 16:39:04 +0200287 * @BSS_CHANGED_QOS: QoS for this association was enabled/disabled. Note
288 * that it is only ever disabled for station mode.
Johannes Berg7da7cc12010-08-05 17:02:38 +0200289 * @BSS_CHANGED_IDLE: Idle changed for this BSS/interface.
Marek Puzyniak0ca54f62013-04-10 13:19:13 +0200290 * @BSS_CHANGED_SSID: SSID changed for this BSS (AP and IBSS mode)
Arik Nemtsov02945822011-11-10 11:28:57 +0200291 * @BSS_CHANGED_AP_PROBE_RESP: Probe Response changed for this BSS (AP mode)
Eliad Pellerab095872012-07-27 12:33:22 +0300292 * @BSS_CHANGED_PS: PS changed for this BSS (STA mode)
Johannes Berg1ea6f9c2012-10-24 10:59:25 +0200293 * @BSS_CHANGED_TXPOWER: TX power setting changed for this interface
Johannes Berg488dd7b2012-10-29 20:08:01 +0100294 * @BSS_CHANGED_P2P_PS: P2P powersave settings (CTWindow, opportunistic PS)
Ayala Beker52cfa1d2016-03-17 15:41:39 +0200295 * changed
Alexander Bondar989c6502013-05-16 17:34:17 +0300296 * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INFO: Data from the AP's beacon became available:
297 * currently dtim_period only is under consideration.
Johannes Berg2c9b7352013-02-07 21:37:29 +0100298 * @BSS_CHANGED_BANDWIDTH: The bandwidth used by this interface changed,
299 * note that this is only called when it changes after the channel
300 * context had been assigned.
Rostislav Lisovy239281f2014-11-03 10:33:19 +0100301 * @BSS_CHANGED_OCB: OCB join status changed
Sara Sharon23a1f8d2015-12-08 16:04:31 +0200302 * @BSS_CHANGED_MU_GROUPS: VHT MU-MIMO group id or user position changed
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100303 */
304enum ieee80211_bss_change {
305 BSS_CHANGED_ASSOC = 1<<0,
306 BSS_CHANGED_ERP_CTS_PROT = 1<<1,
307 BSS_CHANGED_ERP_PREAMBLE = 1<<2,
Jouni Malinen9f1ba902008-08-07 20:07:01 +0300308 BSS_CHANGED_ERP_SLOT = 1<<3,
Alexander Simona7ce1c92011-09-18 00:16:45 +0200309 BSS_CHANGED_HT = 1<<4,
Johannes Berg96dd22a2008-09-11 00:01:57 +0200310 BSS_CHANGED_BASIC_RATES = 1<<5,
Johannes Berg57c4d7b2009-04-23 16:10:04 +0200311 BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INT = 1<<6,
Johannes Berg2d0ddec2009-04-23 16:13:26 +0200312 BSS_CHANGED_BSSID = 1<<7,
313 BSS_CHANGED_BEACON = 1<<8,
314 BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_ENABLED = 1<<9,
Juuso Oikarinena97c13c2010-03-23 09:02:34 +0200315 BSS_CHANGED_CQM = 1<<10,
Johannes Berg8fc214b2010-04-28 17:40:43 +0200316 BSS_CHANGED_IBSS = 1<<11,
Juuso Oikarinen68542962010-06-09 13:43:26 +0300317 BSS_CHANGED_ARP_FILTER = 1<<12,
Johannes Berg4ced3f72010-07-19 16:39:04 +0200318 BSS_CHANGED_QOS = 1<<13,
Johannes Berg7da7cc12010-08-05 17:02:38 +0200319 BSS_CHANGED_IDLE = 1<<14,
Arik Nemtsov78274932011-09-04 11:11:32 +0300320 BSS_CHANGED_SSID = 1<<15,
Arik Nemtsov02945822011-11-10 11:28:57 +0200321 BSS_CHANGED_AP_PROBE_RESP = 1<<16,
Eliad Pellerab095872012-07-27 12:33:22 +0300322 BSS_CHANGED_PS = 1<<17,
Johannes Berg1ea6f9c2012-10-24 10:59:25 +0200323 BSS_CHANGED_TXPOWER = 1<<18,
Johannes Berg488dd7b2012-10-29 20:08:01 +0100324 BSS_CHANGED_P2P_PS = 1<<19,
Alexander Bondar989c6502013-05-16 17:34:17 +0300325 BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INFO = 1<<20,
Johannes Berg2c9b7352013-02-07 21:37:29 +0100326 BSS_CHANGED_BANDWIDTH = 1<<21,
Rostislav Lisovy239281f2014-11-03 10:33:19 +0100327 BSS_CHANGED_OCB = 1<<22,
Sara Sharon23a1f8d2015-12-08 16:04:31 +0200328 BSS_CHANGED_MU_GROUPS = 1<<23,
Johannes Bergac8dd502010-05-05 09:44:02 +0200329
330 /* when adding here, make sure to change ieee80211_reconfig */
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100331};
332
Juuso Oikarinen68542962010-06-09 13:43:26 +0300333/*
334 * The maximum number of IPv4 addresses listed for ARP filtering. If the number
335 * of addresses for an interface increase beyond this value, hardware ARP
336 * filtering will be disabled.
337 */
338#define IEEE80211_BSS_ARP_ADDR_LIST_LEN 4
339
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100340/**
Emmanuel Grumbacha8182922015-03-16 23:23:34 +0200341 * enum ieee80211_event_type - event to be notified to the low level driver
342 * @RSSI_EVENT: AP's rssi crossed the a threshold set by the driver.
Emmanuel Grumbacha9409092015-03-16 23:23:35 +0200343 * @MLME_EVENT: event related to MLME
Emmanuel Grumbach63822462015-04-20 22:53:37 +0300344 * @BAR_RX_EVENT: a BAR was received
Emmanuel Grumbachb497de62015-04-20 22:53:38 +0300345 * @BA_FRAME_TIMEOUT: Frames were released from the reordering buffer because
346 * they timed out. This won't be called for each frame released, but only
347 * once each time the timeout triggers.
Meenakshi Venkataraman615f7b92011-07-08 08:46:22 -0700348 */
Emmanuel Grumbacha8182922015-03-16 23:23:34 +0200349enum ieee80211_event_type {
350 RSSI_EVENT,
Emmanuel Grumbacha9409092015-03-16 23:23:35 +0200351 MLME_EVENT,
Emmanuel Grumbach63822462015-04-20 22:53:37 +0300352 BAR_RX_EVENT,
Emmanuel Grumbachb497de62015-04-20 22:53:38 +0300353 BA_FRAME_TIMEOUT,
Emmanuel Grumbacha8182922015-03-16 23:23:34 +0200354};
355
356/**
357 * enum ieee80211_rssi_event_data - relevant when event type is %RSSI_EVENT
358 * @RSSI_EVENT_HIGH: AP's rssi went below the threshold set by the driver.
359 * @RSSI_EVENT_LOW: AP's rssi went above the threshold set by the driver.
360 */
361enum ieee80211_rssi_event_data {
Meenakshi Venkataraman615f7b92011-07-08 08:46:22 -0700362 RSSI_EVENT_HIGH,
363 RSSI_EVENT_LOW,
364};
365
366/**
Jonathan Corbeta839e462015-04-13 18:27:35 +0200367 * struct ieee80211_rssi_event - data attached to an %RSSI_EVENT
Emmanuel Grumbacha8182922015-03-16 23:23:34 +0200368 * @data: See &enum ieee80211_rssi_event_data
369 */
370struct ieee80211_rssi_event {
371 enum ieee80211_rssi_event_data data;
372};
373
374/**
Emmanuel Grumbacha9409092015-03-16 23:23:35 +0200375 * enum ieee80211_mlme_event_data - relevant when event type is %MLME_EVENT
376 * @AUTH_EVENT: the MLME operation is authentication
Emmanuel Grumbachd0d1a122015-03-16 23:23:36 +0200377 * @ASSOC_EVENT: the MLME operation is association
Emmanuel Grumbacha90faa92015-03-16 23:23:37 +0200378 * @DEAUTH_RX_EVENT: deauth received..
379 * @DEAUTH_TX_EVENT: deauth sent.
Emmanuel Grumbacha9409092015-03-16 23:23:35 +0200380 */
381enum ieee80211_mlme_event_data {
382 AUTH_EVENT,
Emmanuel Grumbachd0d1a122015-03-16 23:23:36 +0200383 ASSOC_EVENT,
Emmanuel Grumbacha90faa92015-03-16 23:23:37 +0200384 DEAUTH_RX_EVENT,
385 DEAUTH_TX_EVENT,
Emmanuel Grumbacha9409092015-03-16 23:23:35 +0200386};
387
388/**
389 * enum ieee80211_mlme_event_status - relevant when event type is %MLME_EVENT
390 * @MLME_SUCCESS: the MLME operation completed successfully.
391 * @MLME_DENIED: the MLME operation was denied by the peer.
392 * @MLME_TIMEOUT: the MLME operation timed out.
393 */
394enum ieee80211_mlme_event_status {
395 MLME_SUCCESS,
396 MLME_DENIED,
397 MLME_TIMEOUT,
398};
399
400/**
Jonathan Corbeta839e462015-04-13 18:27:35 +0200401 * struct ieee80211_mlme_event - data attached to an %MLME_EVENT
Emmanuel Grumbacha9409092015-03-16 23:23:35 +0200402 * @data: See &enum ieee80211_mlme_event_data
403 * @status: See &enum ieee80211_mlme_event_status
404 * @reason: the reason code if applicable
405 */
406struct ieee80211_mlme_event {
407 enum ieee80211_mlme_event_data data;
408 enum ieee80211_mlme_event_status status;
409 u16 reason;
410};
411
412/**
Emmanuel Grumbach63822462015-04-20 22:53:37 +0300413 * struct ieee80211_ba_event - data attached for BlockAck related events
414 * @sta: pointer to the &ieee80211_sta to which this event relates
415 * @tid: the tid
Emmanuel Grumbachb497de62015-04-20 22:53:38 +0300416 * @ssn: the starting sequence number (for %BAR_RX_EVENT)
Emmanuel Grumbach63822462015-04-20 22:53:37 +0300417 */
418struct ieee80211_ba_event {
419 struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
420 u16 tid;
421 u16 ssn;
422};
423
424/**
Emmanuel Grumbacha8182922015-03-16 23:23:34 +0200425 * struct ieee80211_event - event to be sent to the driver
Jonathan Corbeta839e462015-04-13 18:27:35 +0200426 * @type: The event itself. See &enum ieee80211_event_type.
Emmanuel Grumbacha8182922015-03-16 23:23:34 +0200427 * @rssi: relevant if &type is %RSSI_EVENT
Emmanuel Grumbacha9409092015-03-16 23:23:35 +0200428 * @mlme: relevant if &type is %AUTH_EVENT
Emmanuel Grumbachb497de62015-04-20 22:53:38 +0300429 * @ba: relevant if &type is %BAR_RX_EVENT or %BA_FRAME_TIMEOUT
Emmanuel Grumbach63822462015-04-20 22:53:37 +0300430 * @u:union holding the fields above
Emmanuel Grumbacha8182922015-03-16 23:23:34 +0200431 */
432struct ieee80211_event {
433 enum ieee80211_event_type type;
434 union {
435 struct ieee80211_rssi_event rssi;
Emmanuel Grumbacha9409092015-03-16 23:23:35 +0200436 struct ieee80211_mlme_event mlme;
Emmanuel Grumbach63822462015-04-20 22:53:37 +0300437 struct ieee80211_ba_event ba;
Emmanuel Grumbacha8182922015-03-16 23:23:34 +0200438 } u;
439};
440
441/**
Sara Sharon23a1f8d2015-12-08 16:04:31 +0200442 * struct ieee80211_mu_group_data - STA's VHT MU-MIMO group data
443 *
444 * This structure describes the group id data of VHT MU-MIMO
445 *
446 * @membership: 64 bits array - a bit is set if station is member of the group
447 * @position: 2 bits per group id indicating the position in the group
448 */
449struct ieee80211_mu_group_data {
450 u8 membership[WLAN_MEMBERSHIP_LEN];
451 u8 position[WLAN_USER_POSITION_LEN];
452};
453
454/**
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100455 * struct ieee80211_bss_conf - holds the BSS's changing parameters
456 *
457 * This structure keeps information about a BSS (and an association
458 * to that BSS) that can change during the lifetime of the BSS.
459 *
460 * @assoc: association status
Johannes Berg8fc214b2010-04-28 17:40:43 +0200461 * @ibss_joined: indicates whether this station is part of an IBSS
462 * or not
Sujith Manoharanc13a7652012-10-12 17:35:45 +0530463 * @ibss_creator: indicates if a new IBSS network is being created
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100464 * @aid: association ID number, valid only when @assoc is true
465 * @use_cts_prot: use CTS protection
Johannes Bergea1b2b452015-06-02 20:15:49 +0200466 * @use_short_preamble: use 802.11b short preamble
467 * @use_short_slot: use short slot time (only relevant for ERP)
Johannes Berg56007a02010-01-26 14:19:52 +0100468 * @dtim_period: num of beacons before the next DTIM, for beaconing,
Emmanuel Grumbachc65dd142012-12-12 10:12:24 +0200469 * valid in station mode only if after the driver was notified
Alexander Bondar989c6502013-05-16 17:34:17 +0300470 * with the %BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INFO flag, will be non-zero then.
Johannes Berg8c358bc2012-05-22 22:13:05 +0200471 * @sync_tsf: last beacon's/probe response's TSF timestamp (could be old
Johannes Bergef429da2013-02-05 17:48:40 +0100472 * as it may have been received during scanning long ago). If the
473 * HW flag %IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY is set, then this can
474 * only come from a beacon, but might not become valid until after
475 * association when a beacon is received (which is notified with the
Alexander Bondar2ecc3902015-03-01 09:10:00 +0200476 * %BSS_CHANGED_DTIM flag.). See also sync_dtim_count important notice.
Johannes Berg8c358bc2012-05-22 22:13:05 +0200477 * @sync_device_ts: the device timestamp corresponding to the sync_tsf,
478 * the driver/device can use this to calculate synchronisation
Alexander Bondar2ecc3902015-03-01 09:10:00 +0200479 * (see @sync_tsf). See also sync_dtim_count important notice.
Johannes Bergef429da2013-02-05 17:48:40 +0100480 * @sync_dtim_count: Only valid when %IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY
481 * is requested, see @sync_tsf/@sync_device_ts.
Alexander Bondar2ecc3902015-03-01 09:10:00 +0200482 * IMPORTANT: These three sync_* parameters would possibly be out of sync
483 * by the time the driver will use them. The synchronized view is currently
484 * guaranteed only in certain callbacks.
Tomas Winkler21c0cbe2008-03-28 16:33:34 -0700485 * @beacon_int: beacon interval
Emmanuel Grumbach98f7dfd2008-07-18 13:52:59 +0800486 * @assoc_capability: capabilities taken from assoc resp
Johannes Berg96dd22a2008-09-11 00:01:57 +0200487 * @basic_rates: bitmap of basic rates, each bit stands for an
488 * index into the rate table configured by the driver in
489 * the current band.
Alexander Bondar817cee72013-05-19 14:23:57 +0300490 * @beacon_rate: associated AP's beacon TX rate
Felix Fietkaudd5b4cc2010-11-22 20:58:24 +0100491 * @mcast_rate: per-band multicast rate index + 1 (0: disabled)
Johannes Berg2d0ddec2009-04-23 16:13:26 +0200492 * @bssid: The BSSID for this BSS
493 * @enable_beacon: whether beaconing should be enabled or not
Johannes Berg4bf88532012-11-09 11:39:59 +0100494 * @chandef: Channel definition for this BSS -- the hardware might be
495 * configured a higher bandwidth than this BSS uses, for example.
Sara Sharon23a1f8d2015-12-08 16:04:31 +0200496 * @mu_group: VHT MU-MIMO group membership data
Johannes Berg074d46d2012-03-15 19:45:16 +0100497 * @ht_operation_mode: HT operation mode like in &struct ieee80211_ht_operation.
Avri Altman22f66892015-08-18 16:52:07 +0300498 * This field is only valid when the channel is a wide HT/VHT channel.
499 * Note that with TDLS this can be the case (channel is HT, protection must
500 * be used from this field) even when the BSS association isn't using HT.
Juuso Oikarinena97c13c2010-03-23 09:02:34 +0200501 * @cqm_rssi_thold: Connection quality monitor RSSI threshold, a zero value
Johannes Berge86abc62015-10-22 17:35:14 +0200502 * implies disabled. As with the cfg80211 callback, a change here should
503 * cause an event to be sent indicating where the current value is in
504 * relation to the newly configured threshold.
Juuso Oikarinena97c13c2010-03-23 09:02:34 +0200505 * @cqm_rssi_hyst: Connection quality monitor RSSI hysteresis
Juuso Oikarinen68542962010-06-09 13:43:26 +0300506 * @arp_addr_list: List of IPv4 addresses for hardware ARP filtering. The
507 * may filter ARP queries targeted for other addresses than listed here.
508 * The driver must allow ARP queries targeted for all address listed here
509 * to pass through. An empty list implies no ARP queries need to pass.
Johannes Berg0f19b412013-01-14 16:39:07 +0100510 * @arp_addr_cnt: Number of addresses currently on the list. Note that this
511 * may be larger than %IEEE80211_BSS_ARP_ADDR_LIST_LEN (the arp_addr_list
512 * array size), it's up to the driver what to do in that case.
Johannes Berg4ced3f72010-07-19 16:39:04 +0200513 * @qos: This is a QoS-enabled BSS.
Johannes Berg7da7cc12010-08-05 17:02:38 +0200514 * @idle: This interface is idle. There's also a global idle flag in the
515 * hardware config which may be more appropriate depending on what
516 * your driver/device needs to do.
Eliad Pellerab095872012-07-27 12:33:22 +0300517 * @ps: power-save mode (STA only). This flag is NOT affected by
518 * offchannel/dynamic_ps operations.
Marek Puzyniak0ca54f62013-04-10 13:19:13 +0200519 * @ssid: The SSID of the current vif. Valid in AP and IBSS mode.
Arik Nemtsov78274932011-09-04 11:11:32 +0300520 * @ssid_len: Length of SSID given in @ssid.
521 * @hidden_ssid: The SSID of the current vif is hidden. Only valid in AP-mode.
Johannes Berg1ea6f9c2012-10-24 10:59:25 +0200522 * @txpower: TX power in dBm
Lorenzo Bianconidb82d8a2015-01-14 12:55:08 +0100523 * @txpower_type: TX power adjustment used to control per packet Transmit
524 * Power Control (TPC) in lower driver for the current vif. In particular
525 * TPC is enabled if value passed in %txpower_type is
526 * NL80211_TX_POWER_LIMITED (allow using less than specified from
527 * userspace), whereas TPC is disabled if %txpower_type is set to
528 * NL80211_TX_POWER_FIXED (use value configured from userspace)
Janusz Dziedzic67baf662013-03-21 15:47:56 +0100529 * @p2p_noa_attr: P2P NoA attribute for P2P powersave
Ayala Beker52cfa1d2016-03-17 15:41:39 +0200530 * @allow_p2p_go_ps: indication for AP or P2P GO interface, whether it's allowed
531 * to use P2P PS mechanism or not. AP/P2P GO is not allowed to use P2P PS
532 * if it has associated clients without P2P PS support.
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100533 */
534struct ieee80211_bss_conf {
Johannes Berg2d0ddec2009-04-23 16:13:26 +0200535 const u8 *bssid;
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100536 /* association related data */
Johannes Berg8fc214b2010-04-28 17:40:43 +0200537 bool assoc, ibss_joined;
Sujith Manoharanc13a7652012-10-12 17:35:45 +0530538 bool ibss_creator;
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100539 u16 aid;
540 /* erp related data */
541 bool use_cts_prot;
542 bool use_short_preamble;
Jouni Malinen9f1ba902008-08-07 20:07:01 +0300543 bool use_short_slot;
Johannes Berg2d0ddec2009-04-23 16:13:26 +0200544 bool enable_beacon;
Emmanuel Grumbach98f7dfd2008-07-18 13:52:59 +0800545 u8 dtim_period;
Tomas Winkler21c0cbe2008-03-28 16:33:34 -0700546 u16 beacon_int;
547 u16 assoc_capability;
Johannes Berg8c358bc2012-05-22 22:13:05 +0200548 u64 sync_tsf;
549 u32 sync_device_ts;
Johannes Bergef429da2013-02-05 17:48:40 +0100550 u8 sync_dtim_count;
Johannes Berg881d9482009-01-21 15:13:48 +0100551 u32 basic_rates;
Alexander Bondar817cee72013-05-19 14:23:57 +0300552 struct ieee80211_rate *beacon_rate;
Johannes Berg57fbcce2016-04-12 15:56:15 +0200553 int mcast_rate[NUM_NL80211_BANDS];
Johannes Berg9ed6bcc2009-05-08 20:47:39 +0200554 u16 ht_operation_mode;
Juuso Oikarinena97c13c2010-03-23 09:02:34 +0200555 s32 cqm_rssi_thold;
556 u32 cqm_rssi_hyst;
Johannes Berg4bf88532012-11-09 11:39:59 +0100557 struct cfg80211_chan_def chandef;
Sara Sharon23a1f8d2015-12-08 16:04:31 +0200558 struct ieee80211_mu_group_data mu_group;
Juuso Oikarinen68542962010-06-09 13:43:26 +0300559 __be32 arp_addr_list[IEEE80211_BSS_ARP_ADDR_LIST_LEN];
Johannes Berg0f19b412013-01-14 16:39:07 +0100560 int arp_addr_cnt;
Johannes Berg4ced3f72010-07-19 16:39:04 +0200561 bool qos;
Johannes Berg7da7cc12010-08-05 17:02:38 +0200562 bool idle;
Eliad Pellerab095872012-07-27 12:33:22 +0300563 bool ps;
Arik Nemtsov78274932011-09-04 11:11:32 +0300564 u8 ssid[IEEE80211_MAX_SSID_LEN];
565 size_t ssid_len;
566 bool hidden_ssid;
Johannes Berg1ea6f9c2012-10-24 10:59:25 +0200567 int txpower;
Lorenzo Bianconidb82d8a2015-01-14 12:55:08 +0100568 enum nl80211_tx_power_setting txpower_type;
Janusz Dziedzic67baf662013-03-21 15:47:56 +0100569 struct ieee80211_p2p_noa_attr p2p_noa_attr;
Ayala Beker52cfa1d2016-03-17 15:41:39 +0200570 bool allow_p2p_go_ps;
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100571};
572
Ron Rindjunsky11f4b1c2008-03-04 18:09:26 -0800573/**
Johannes Bergaf61a162013-07-02 18:09:12 +0200574 * enum mac80211_tx_info_flags - flags to describe transmission information/status
Ron Rindjunsky11f4b1c2008-03-04 18:09:26 -0800575 *
Randy Dunlap6ef307b2008-07-03 13:52:18 -0700576 * These flags are used with the @flags member of &ieee80211_tx_info.
Ron Rindjunsky11f4b1c2008-03-04 18:09:26 -0800577 *
Johannes Berg7351c6b2009-11-19 01:08:30 +0100578 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_REQ_TX_STATUS: require TX status callback for this frame.
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200579 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_ASSIGN_SEQ: The driver has to assign a sequence
580 * number to this frame, taking care of not overwriting the fragment
581 * number and increasing the sequence number only when the
582 * IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT flag is set. mac80211 will properly
583 * assign sequence numbers to QoS-data frames but cannot do so correctly
584 * for non-QoS-data and management frames because beacons need them from
585 * that counter as well and mac80211 cannot guarantee proper sequencing.
586 * If this flag is set, the driver should instruct the hardware to
587 * assign a sequence number to the frame or assign one itself. Cf. IEEE
588 * 802.11-2007 7.1.3.4.1 paragraph 3. This flag will always be set for
589 * beacons and always be clear for frames without a sequence number field.
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200590 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK: tell the low level not to wait for an ack
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200591 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT: clear powersave filter for destination
592 * station
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200593 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT: this is a first fragment of the frame
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200594 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_SEND_AFTER_DTIM: send this frame after DTIM beacon
595 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_AMPDU: this frame should be sent as part of an A-MPDU
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200596 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_INJECTED: Frame was injected, internal to mac80211.
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200597 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED: The frame was not transmitted
Johannes Bergab5b5342009-08-07 16:28:09 +0200598 * because the destination STA was in powersave mode. Note that to
599 * avoid race conditions, the filter must be set by the hardware or
600 * firmware upon receiving a frame that indicates that the station
601 * went to sleep (must be done on device to filter frames already on
602 * the queue) and may only be unset after mac80211 gives the OK for
603 * that by setting the IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT (see above),
604 * since only then is it guaranteed that no more frames are in the
605 * hardware queue.
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200606 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_ACK: Frame was acknowledged
607 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU: The frame was aggregated, so status
608 * is for the whole aggregation.
Ron Rindjunsky429a3802008-07-01 14:16:03 +0300609 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU_NO_BACK: no block ack was returned,
610 * so consider using block ack request (BAR).
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200611 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_RATE_CTRL_PROBE: internal to mac80211, can be
612 * set by rate control algorithms to indicate probe rate, will
613 * be cleared for fragmented frames (except on the last fragment)
Seth Forshee6c17b772013-02-11 11:21:07 -0600614 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_OFFCHAN_TX_OK: Internal to mac80211. Used to indicate
615 * that a frame can be transmitted while the queues are stopped for
616 * off-channel operation.
Johannes Bergcd8ffc82009-03-23 17:28:41 +0100617 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_NEED_TXPROCESSING: completely internal to mac80211,
618 * used to indicate that a pending frame requires TX processing before
619 * it can be sent out.
Johannes Berg8f77f382009-06-07 21:58:37 +0200620 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRIED: completely internal to mac80211,
621 * used to indicate that a frame was already retried due to PS
Johannes Berg3b8d81e02009-06-17 17:43:56 +0200622 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_DONT_ENCRYPT: completely internal to mac80211,
623 * used to indicate frame should not be encrypted
Johannes Berg02f2f1a2012-02-27 12:18:30 +0100624 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER: This frame is a response to a poll
625 * frame (PS-Poll or uAPSD) or a non-bufferable MMPDU and must
626 * be sent although the station is in powersave mode.
Johannes Bergad5351d2009-08-07 16:42:15 +0200627 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_MORE_FRAMES: More frames will be passed to the
628 * transmit function after the current frame, this can be used
629 * by drivers to kick the DMA queue only if unset or when the
630 * queue gets full.
Johannes Bergc6fcf6b2010-01-17 01:47:59 +0100631 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRANSMISSION: This frame is being retransmitted
632 * after TX status because the destination was asleep, it must not
633 * be modified again (no seqno assignment, crypto, etc.)
Johannes Berg1672c0e32013-01-29 15:02:27 +0100634 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_MLME_CONN_TX: This frame was transmitted by the MLME
635 * code for connection establishment, this indicates that its status
636 * should kick the MLME state machine.
Jouni Malinen026331c2010-02-15 12:53:10 +0200637 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_NL80211_FRAME_TX: Frame was requested through nl80211
638 * MLME command (internal to mac80211 to figure out whether to send TX
639 * status to user space)
Luis R. Rodriguez0a56bd02010-04-15 17:39:37 -0400640 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_LDPC: tells the driver to use LDPC for this frame
Felix Fietkauf79d9ba2010-04-19 19:57:35 +0200641 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC: Enables Space-Time Block Coding (STBC) for this
642 * frame and selects the maximum number of streams that it can use.
Johannes Berg610dbc92011-01-06 22:36:44 +0100643 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_TX_OFFCHAN: Marks this packet to be transmitted on
644 * the off-channel channel when a remain-on-channel offload is done
645 * in hardware -- normal packets still flow and are expected to be
646 * handled properly by the device.
Jouni Malinen681d1192011-02-03 18:35:19 +0200647 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_TKIP_MIC_FAILURE: Marks this packet to be used for TKIP
648 * testing. It will be sent out with incorrect Michael MIC key to allow
649 * TKIP countermeasures to be tested.
Rajkumar Manoharanaad14ce2011-09-25 14:53:31 +0530650 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_CCK_RATE: This frame will be sent at non CCK rate.
651 * This flag is actually used for management frame especially for P2P
652 * frames not being sent at CCK rate in 2GHz band.
Johannes Berg47086fc2011-09-29 16:04:33 +0200653 * @IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP: This packet marks the end of service period,
654 * when its status is reported the service period ends. For frames in
655 * an SP that mac80211 transmits, it is already set; for driver frames
Johannes Bergdeeaee12011-09-29 16:04:35 +0200656 * the driver may set this flag. It is also used to do the same for
657 * PS-Poll responses.
Rajkumar Manoharanb6f35302011-09-29 20:34:04 +0530658 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_USE_MINRATE: This frame will be sent at lowest rate.
659 * This flag is used to send nullfunc frame at minimum rate when
660 * the nullfunc is used for connection monitoring purpose.
Johannes Berga26eb272011-10-07 14:01:25 +0200661 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_DONTFRAG: Don't fragment this packet even if it
662 * would be fragmented by size (this is optional, only used for
663 * monitor injection).
Sujith Manoharan5cf16612014-12-10 21:26:11 +0530664 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_NOACK_TRANSMITTED: A frame that was marked with
665 * IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK has been successfully transmitted without
666 * any errors (like issues specific to the driver/HW).
667 * This flag must not be set for frames that don't request no-ack
668 * behaviour with IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK.
Christian Lampartereb7d3062010-09-21 21:36:18 +0200669 *
670 * Note: If you have to add new flags to the enumeration, then don't
671 * forget to update %IEEE80211_TX_TEMPORARY_FLAGS when necessary.
Ron Rindjunsky11f4b1c2008-03-04 18:09:26 -0800672 */
Johannes Bergaf61a162013-07-02 18:09:12 +0200673enum mac80211_tx_info_flags {
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200674 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_REQ_TX_STATUS = BIT(0),
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200675 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_ASSIGN_SEQ = BIT(1),
676 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK = BIT(2),
677 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT = BIT(3),
678 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT = BIT(4),
679 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_SEND_AFTER_DTIM = BIT(5),
680 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_AMPDU = BIT(6),
681 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_INJECTED = BIT(7),
682 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED = BIT(8),
683 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_ACK = BIT(9),
684 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU = BIT(10),
685 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU_NO_BACK = BIT(11),
686 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_RATE_CTRL_PROBE = BIT(12),
Seth Forshee6c17b772013-02-11 11:21:07 -0600687 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_OFFCHAN_TX_OK = BIT(13),
Johannes Bergcd8ffc82009-03-23 17:28:41 +0100688 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_NEED_TXPROCESSING = BIT(14),
Johannes Berg8f77f382009-06-07 21:58:37 +0200689 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRIED = BIT(15),
Johannes Berg3b8d81e02009-06-17 17:43:56 +0200690 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_DONT_ENCRYPT = BIT(16),
Johannes Berg02f2f1a2012-02-27 12:18:30 +0100691 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER = BIT(17),
Johannes Bergad5351d2009-08-07 16:42:15 +0200692 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_MORE_FRAMES = BIT(18),
Johannes Bergc6fcf6b2010-01-17 01:47:59 +0100693 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRANSMISSION = BIT(19),
Johannes Berg1672c0e32013-01-29 15:02:27 +0100694 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_MLME_CONN_TX = BIT(20),
Jouni Malinen026331c2010-02-15 12:53:10 +0200695 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_NL80211_FRAME_TX = BIT(21),
Luis R. Rodriguez0a56bd02010-04-15 17:39:37 -0400696 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_LDPC = BIT(22),
Felix Fietkauf79d9ba2010-04-19 19:57:35 +0200697 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC = BIT(23) | BIT(24),
Johannes Berg21f83582010-12-18 17:20:47 +0100698 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_TX_OFFCHAN = BIT(25),
Jouni Malinen681d1192011-02-03 18:35:19 +0200699 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_TKIP_MIC_FAILURE = BIT(26),
Rajkumar Manoharanaad14ce2011-09-25 14:53:31 +0530700 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_CCK_RATE = BIT(27),
Johannes Berg47086fc2011-09-29 16:04:33 +0200701 IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP = BIT(28),
Rajkumar Manoharanb6f35302011-09-29 20:34:04 +0530702 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_USE_MINRATE = BIT(29),
Johannes Berga26eb272011-10-07 14:01:25 +0200703 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_DONTFRAG = BIT(30),
Sujith Manoharan5cf16612014-12-10 21:26:11 +0530704 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_NOACK_TRANSMITTED = BIT(31),
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200705};
706
Johannes Bergabe37c42010-06-07 11:12:27 +0200707#define IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC_SHIFT 23
708
Johannes Bergaf61a162013-07-02 18:09:12 +0200709/**
710 * enum mac80211_tx_control_flags - flags to describe transmit control
711 *
712 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PORT_CTRL_PROTO: this frame is a port control
713 * protocol frame (e.g. EAP)
Sujith Manoharan6b127c72014-12-10 21:26:10 +0530714 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PS_RESPONSE: This frame is a response to a poll
715 * frame (PS-Poll or uAPSD).
Sven Eckelmanndfdfc2b2016-01-26 17:11:13 +0100716 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_RATE_INJECT: This frame is injected with rate information
Felix Fietkau6e0456b2016-03-03 22:59:00 +0100717 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_AMSDU: This frame is an A-MSDU frame
Johannes Bergaf61a162013-07-02 18:09:12 +0200718 *
719 * These flags are used in tx_info->control.flags.
720 */
721enum mac80211_tx_control_flags {
722 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PORT_CTRL_PROTO = BIT(0),
Sujith Manoharan6b127c72014-12-10 21:26:10 +0530723 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PS_RESPONSE = BIT(1),
Sven Eckelmanndfdfc2b2016-01-26 17:11:13 +0100724 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_RATE_INJECT = BIT(2),
Felix Fietkau6e0456b2016-03-03 22:59:00 +0100725 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_AMSDU = BIT(3),
Johannes Bergaf61a162013-07-02 18:09:12 +0200726};
727
Christian Lampartereb7d3062010-09-21 21:36:18 +0200728/*
729 * This definition is used as a mask to clear all temporary flags, which are
730 * set by the tx handlers for each transmission attempt by the mac80211 stack.
731 */
732#define IEEE80211_TX_TEMPORARY_FLAGS (IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK | \
733 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT | \
734 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_SEND_AFTER_DTIM | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_AMPDU | \
735 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED | IEEE80211_TX_STAT_ACK | \
736 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU | IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU_NO_BACK | \
Johannes Berg02f2f1a2012-02-27 12:18:30 +0100737 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_RATE_CTRL_PROBE | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER | \
Christian Lampartereb7d3062010-09-21 21:36:18 +0200738 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_MORE_FRAMES | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_LDPC | \
Johannes Berg47086fc2011-09-29 16:04:33 +0200739 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC | IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP)
Christian Lampartereb7d3062010-09-21 21:36:18 +0200740
Sujith2134e7e2009-01-22 09:00:52 +0530741/**
742 * enum mac80211_rate_control_flags - per-rate flags set by the
743 * Rate Control algorithm.
744 *
745 * These flags are set by the Rate control algorithm for each rate during tx,
746 * in the @flags member of struct ieee80211_tx_rate.
747 *
748 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_RTS_CTS: Use RTS/CTS exchange for this rate.
749 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_CTS_PROTECT: CTS-to-self protection is required.
750 * This is set if the current BSS requires ERP protection.
751 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_SHORT_PREAMBLE: Use short preamble.
752 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_MCS: HT rate.
Johannes Berg8bc83c22012-11-09 18:38:32 +0100753 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_VHT_MCS: VHT MCS rate, in this case the idx field is split
754 * into a higher 4 bits (Nss) and lower 4 bits (MCS number)
Sujith2134e7e2009-01-22 09:00:52 +0530755 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_GREEN_FIELD: Indicates whether this rate should be used in
756 * Greenfield mode.
757 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_40_MHZ_WIDTH: Indicates if the Channel Width should be 40 MHz.
Johannes Berg8bc83c22012-11-09 18:38:32 +0100758 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_80_MHZ_WIDTH: Indicates 80 MHz transmission
759 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_160_MHZ_WIDTH: Indicates 160 MHz transmission
760 * (80+80 isn't supported yet)
Sujith2134e7e2009-01-22 09:00:52 +0530761 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_DUP_DATA: The frame should be transmitted on both of the
762 * adjacent 20 MHz channels, if the current channel type is
763 * NL80211_CHAN_HT40MINUS or NL80211_CHAN_HT40PLUS.
764 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_SHORT_GI: Short Guard interval should be used for this rate.
765 */
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200766enum mac80211_rate_control_flags {
767 IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_RTS_CTS = BIT(0),
768 IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_CTS_PROTECT = BIT(1),
769 IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_SHORT_PREAMBLE = BIT(2),
770
Johannes Berg8bc83c22012-11-09 18:38:32 +0100771 /* rate index is an HT/VHT MCS instead of an index */
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200772 IEEE80211_TX_RC_MCS = BIT(3),
773 IEEE80211_TX_RC_GREEN_FIELD = BIT(4),
774 IEEE80211_TX_RC_40_MHZ_WIDTH = BIT(5),
775 IEEE80211_TX_RC_DUP_DATA = BIT(6),
776 IEEE80211_TX_RC_SHORT_GI = BIT(7),
Johannes Berg8bc83c22012-11-09 18:38:32 +0100777 IEEE80211_TX_RC_VHT_MCS = BIT(8),
778 IEEE80211_TX_RC_80_MHZ_WIDTH = BIT(9),
779 IEEE80211_TX_RC_160_MHZ_WIDTH = BIT(10),
Ron Rindjunsky11f4b1c2008-03-04 18:09:26 -0800780};
781
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200782
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200783/* there are 40 bytes if you don't need the rateset to be kept */
784#define IEEE80211_TX_INFO_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE 40
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200785
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200786/* if you do need the rateset, then you have less space */
787#define IEEE80211_TX_INFO_RATE_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE 24
788
789/* maximum number of rate stages */
Thomas Huehne3e1a0b2012-07-02 19:46:16 +0200790#define IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES 4
Felix Fietkau870abdf2008-10-05 18:04:24 +0200791
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +0200792/* maximum number of rate table entries */
793#define IEEE80211_TX_RATE_TABLE_SIZE 4
794
Felix Fietkau870abdf2008-10-05 18:04:24 +0200795/**
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200796 * struct ieee80211_tx_rate - rate selection/status
Felix Fietkau870abdf2008-10-05 18:04:24 +0200797 *
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200798 * @idx: rate index to attempt to send with
799 * @flags: rate control flags (&enum mac80211_rate_control_flags)
Johannes Berge25cf4a2008-10-23 08:51:20 +0200800 * @count: number of tries in this rate before going to the next rate
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200801 *
802 * A value of -1 for @idx indicates an invalid rate and, if used
803 * in an array of retry rates, that no more rates should be tried.
804 *
805 * When used for transmit status reporting, the driver should
806 * always report the rate along with the flags it used.
Johannes Bergc555b9b2009-08-07 16:23:43 +0200807 *
808 * &struct ieee80211_tx_info contains an array of these structs
809 * in the control information, and it will be filled by the rate
810 * control algorithm according to what should be sent. For example,
811 * if this array contains, in the format { <idx>, <count> } the
812 * information
813 * { 3, 2 }, { 2, 2 }, { 1, 4 }, { -1, 0 }, { -1, 0 }
814 * then this means that the frame should be transmitted
815 * up to twice at rate 3, up to twice at rate 2, and up to four
816 * times at rate 1 if it doesn't get acknowledged. Say it gets
817 * acknowledged by the peer after the fifth attempt, the status
818 * information should then contain
819 * { 3, 2 }, { 2, 2 }, { 1, 1 }, { -1, 0 } ...
820 * since it was transmitted twice at rate 3, twice at rate 2
821 * and once at rate 1 after which we received an acknowledgement.
Felix Fietkau870abdf2008-10-05 18:04:24 +0200822 */
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200823struct ieee80211_tx_rate {
824 s8 idx;
Johannes Berg8bc83c22012-11-09 18:38:32 +0100825 u16 count:5,
826 flags:11;
Gustavo F. Padovan3f30fc12010-07-21 10:59:58 +0000827} __packed;
Felix Fietkau870abdf2008-10-05 18:04:24 +0200828
Johannes Berg8bc83c22012-11-09 18:38:32 +0100829#define IEEE80211_MAX_TX_RETRY 31
830
831static inline void ieee80211_rate_set_vht(struct ieee80211_tx_rate *rate,
832 u8 mcs, u8 nss)
833{
834 WARN_ON(mcs & ~0xF);
Karl Beldan6bc83122013-04-15 17:09:29 +0200835 WARN_ON((nss - 1) & ~0x7);
836 rate->idx = ((nss - 1) << 4) | mcs;
Johannes Berg8bc83c22012-11-09 18:38:32 +0100837}
838
839static inline u8
840ieee80211_rate_get_vht_mcs(const struct ieee80211_tx_rate *rate)
841{
842 return rate->idx & 0xF;
843}
844
845static inline u8
846ieee80211_rate_get_vht_nss(const struct ieee80211_tx_rate *rate)
847{
Karl Beldan6bc83122013-04-15 17:09:29 +0200848 return (rate->idx >> 4) + 1;
Johannes Berg8bc83c22012-11-09 18:38:32 +0100849}
850
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200851/**
852 * struct ieee80211_tx_info - skb transmit information
Ivo van Doorn1c014422008-04-17 19:41:02 +0200853 *
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200854 * This structure is placed in skb->cb for three uses:
855 * (1) mac80211 TX control - mac80211 tells the driver what to do
856 * (2) driver internal use (if applicable)
857 * (3) TX status information - driver tells mac80211 what happened
858 *
859 * @flags: transmit info flags, defined above
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200860 * @band: the band to transmit on (use for checking for races)
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +0200861 * @hw_queue: HW queue to put the frame on, skb_get_queue_mapping() gives the AC
Johannes Berga729cff2011-11-06 14:13:34 +0100862 * @ack_frame_id: internal frame ID for TX status, used internally
Randy Dunlap6ef307b2008-07-03 13:52:18 -0700863 * @control: union for control data
864 * @status: union for status data
865 * @driver_data: array of driver_data pointers
Felix Fietkau599bf6a2009-11-15 23:07:30 +0100866 * @ampdu_ack_len: number of acked aggregated frames.
Daniel Halperin93d95b12010-04-18 09:28:18 -0700867 * relevant only if IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU was set.
Felix Fietkau599bf6a2009-11-15 23:07:30 +0100868 * @ampdu_len: number of aggregated frames.
Daniel Halperin93d95b12010-04-18 09:28:18 -0700869 * relevant only if IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU was set.
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200870 * @ack_signal: signal strength of the ACK frame
Ivo van Doorn1c014422008-04-17 19:41:02 +0200871 */
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200872struct ieee80211_tx_info {
873 /* common information */
874 u32 flags;
875 u8 band;
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200876
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +0200877 u8 hw_queue;
Johannes Berg8318d782008-01-24 19:38:38 +0100878
Johannes Berga729cff2011-11-06 14:13:34 +0100879 u16 ack_frame_id;
Johannes Berg8318d782008-01-24 19:38:38 +0100880
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200881 union {
882 struct {
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200883 union {
884 /* rate control */
885 struct {
886 struct ieee80211_tx_rate rates[
887 IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES];
888 s8 rts_cts_rate_idx;
Felix Fietkau991fec02013-04-16 13:38:43 +0200889 u8 use_rts:1;
890 u8 use_cts_prot:1;
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +0200891 u8 short_preamble:1;
892 u8 skip_table:1;
Felix Fietkau991fec02013-04-16 13:38:43 +0200893 /* 2 bytes free */
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200894 };
895 /* only needed before rate control */
896 unsigned long jiffies;
897 };
Johannes Berg25d834e2008-09-12 22:52:47 +0200898 /* NB: vif can be NULL for injected frames */
Michal Kazior5caa3282016-05-19 10:37:51 +0200899 union {
900 /* NB: vif can be NULL for injected frames */
901 struct ieee80211_vif *vif;
902
903 /* When packets are enqueued on txq it's easy
904 * to re-construct the vif pointer. There's no
905 * more space in tx_info so it can be used to
906 * store the necessary enqueue time for packet
907 * sojourn time computation.
908 */
909 codel_time_t enqueue_time;
910 };
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200911 struct ieee80211_key_conf *hw_key;
Johannes Bergaf61a162013-07-02 18:09:12 +0200912 u32 flags;
913 /* 4 bytes free */
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200914 } control;
915 struct {
Johannes Berg3b79af92015-06-01 23:14:59 +0200916 u64 cookie;
917 } ack;
918 struct {
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200919 struct ieee80211_tx_rate rates[IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES];
Eliad Pellera0f995a2014-03-13 14:30:47 +0200920 s32 ack_signal;
Thomas Huehne3e1a0b2012-07-02 19:46:16 +0200921 u8 ampdu_ack_len;
Felix Fietkau599bf6a2009-11-15 23:07:30 +0100922 u8 ampdu_len;
Johannes Bergd748b462012-03-28 11:04:23 +0200923 u8 antenna;
Johannes Berg02219b32014-10-07 10:38:50 +0300924 u16 tx_time;
925 void *status_driver_data[19 / sizeof(void *)];
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200926 } status;
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200927 struct {
928 struct ieee80211_tx_rate driver_rates[
929 IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES];
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +0200930 u8 pad[4];
931
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200932 void *rate_driver_data[
933 IEEE80211_TX_INFO_RATE_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE / sizeof(void *)];
934 };
935 void *driver_data[
936 IEEE80211_TX_INFO_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE / sizeof(void *)];
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200937 };
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -0700938};
939
Luciano Coelho79f460c2011-05-11 17:09:36 +0300940/**
David Spinadelc56ef672014-02-05 15:21:13 +0200941 * struct ieee80211_scan_ies - descriptors for different blocks of IEs
942 *
David Spinadel633e2712014-02-06 16:15:23 +0200943 * This structure is used to point to different blocks of IEs in HW scan
944 * and scheduled scan. These blocks contain the IEs passed by userspace
945 * and the ones generated by mac80211.
David Spinadelc56ef672014-02-05 15:21:13 +0200946 *
947 * @ies: pointers to band specific IEs.
948 * @len: lengths of band_specific IEs.
949 * @common_ies: IEs for all bands (especially vendor specific ones)
950 * @common_ie_len: length of the common_ies
951 */
952struct ieee80211_scan_ies {
Johannes Berg57fbcce2016-04-12 15:56:15 +0200953 const u8 *ies[NUM_NL80211_BANDS];
954 size_t len[NUM_NL80211_BANDS];
David Spinadelc56ef672014-02-05 15:21:13 +0200955 const u8 *common_ies;
956 size_t common_ie_len;
957};
958
959
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200960static inline struct ieee80211_tx_info *IEEE80211_SKB_CB(struct sk_buff *skb)
961{
962 return (struct ieee80211_tx_info *)skb->cb;
963}
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -0400964
Johannes Bergf1d58c22009-06-17 13:13:00 +0200965static inline struct ieee80211_rx_status *IEEE80211_SKB_RXCB(struct sk_buff *skb)
966{
967 return (struct ieee80211_rx_status *)skb->cb;
968}
969
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200970/**
971 * ieee80211_tx_info_clear_status - clear TX status
972 *
973 * @info: The &struct ieee80211_tx_info to be cleared.
974 *
975 * When the driver passes an skb back to mac80211, it must report
976 * a number of things in TX status. This function clears everything
977 * in the TX status but the rate control information (it does clear
978 * the count since you need to fill that in anyway).
979 *
980 * NOTE: You can only use this function if you do NOT use
981 * info->driver_data! Use info->rate_driver_data
982 * instead if you need only the less space that allows.
983 */
984static inline void
985ieee80211_tx_info_clear_status(struct ieee80211_tx_info *info)
986{
987 int i;
988
989 BUILD_BUG_ON(offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.rates) !=
990 offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, control.rates));
991 BUILD_BUG_ON(offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.rates) !=
992 offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, driver_rates));
993 BUILD_BUG_ON(offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.rates) != 8);
994 /* clear the rate counts */
995 for (i = 0; i < IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES; i++)
996 info->status.rates[i].count = 0;
997
998 BUILD_BUG_ON(
Thomas Huehne3e1a0b2012-07-02 19:46:16 +0200999 offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.ack_signal) != 20);
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02001000 memset(&info->status.ampdu_ack_len, 0,
1001 sizeof(struct ieee80211_tx_info) -
1002 offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.ampdu_ack_len));
1003}
1004
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001005
1006/**
1007 * enum mac80211_rx_flags - receive flags
1008 *
1009 * These flags are used with the @flag member of &struct ieee80211_rx_status.
1010 * @RX_FLAG_MMIC_ERROR: Michael MIC error was reported on this frame.
1011 * Use together with %RX_FLAG_MMIC_STRIPPED.
1012 * @RX_FLAG_DECRYPTED: This frame was decrypted in hardware.
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001013 * @RX_FLAG_MMIC_STRIPPED: the Michael MIC is stripped off this frame,
1014 * verification has been done by the hardware.
1015 * @RX_FLAG_IV_STRIPPED: The IV/ICV are stripped from this frame.
1016 * If this flag is set, the stack cannot do any replay detection
1017 * hence the driver or hardware will have to do that.
Johannes Berg981d94a2015-06-12 14:39:02 +02001018 * @RX_FLAG_PN_VALIDATED: Currently only valid for CCMP/GCMP frames, this
1019 * flag indicates that the PN was verified for replay protection.
1020 * Note that this flag is also currently only supported when a frame
1021 * is also decrypted (ie. @RX_FLAG_DECRYPTED must be set)
Luis de Bethencourt84ea3a182016-03-18 16:09:29 +00001022 * @RX_FLAG_DUP_VALIDATED: The driver should set this flag if it did
1023 * de-duplication by itself.
Johannes Berg72abd812007-09-17 01:29:22 -04001024 * @RX_FLAG_FAILED_FCS_CRC: Set this flag if the FCS check failed on
1025 * the frame.
1026 * @RX_FLAG_FAILED_PLCP_CRC: Set this flag if the PCLP check failed on
1027 * the frame.
Thomas Pedersenf4bda332012-11-13 10:46:27 -08001028 * @RX_FLAG_MACTIME_START: The timestamp passed in the RX status (@mactime
Johannes Berg6ebacbb2011-02-23 15:06:08 +01001029 * field) is valid and contains the time the first symbol of the MPDU
1030 * was received. This is useful in monitor mode and for proper IBSS
1031 * merging.
Thomas Pedersenf4bda332012-11-13 10:46:27 -08001032 * @RX_FLAG_MACTIME_END: The timestamp passed in the RX status (@mactime
1033 * field) is valid and contains the time the last symbol of the MPDU
1034 * (including FCS) was received.
Johannes Bergf4a0f0c2016-01-25 15:46:34 +02001035 * @RX_FLAG_MACTIME_PLCP_START: The timestamp passed in the RX status (@mactime
1036 * field) is valid and contains the time the SYNC preamble was received.
Bruno Randolfb4f28bb2008-07-30 17:19:55 +02001037 * @RX_FLAG_SHORTPRE: Short preamble was used for this frame
Jouni Malinen0fb8ca42008-12-12 14:38:33 +02001038 * @RX_FLAG_HT: HT MCS was used and rate_idx is MCS index
Johannes Berg56146182012-11-09 15:07:02 +01001039 * @RX_FLAG_VHT: VHT MCS was used and rate_index is MCS index
Jouni Malinen0fb8ca42008-12-12 14:38:33 +02001040 * @RX_FLAG_40MHZ: HT40 (40 MHz) was used
1041 * @RX_FLAG_SHORT_GI: Short guard interval was used
Felix Fietkaufe8431f2012-03-01 18:00:07 +01001042 * @RX_FLAG_NO_SIGNAL_VAL: The signal strength value is not present.
1043 * Valid only for data frames (mainly A-MPDU)
Johannes Bergac55d2f2012-05-10 09:09:10 +02001044 * @RX_FLAG_HT_GF: This frame was received in a HT-greenfield transmission, if
1045 * the driver fills this value it should add %IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_MCS_HAVE_FMT
1046 * to hw.radiotap_mcs_details to advertise that fact
Johannes Berg4c298672012-07-05 11:34:31 +02001047 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DETAILS: A-MPDU details are known, in particular the reference
1048 * number (@ampdu_reference) must be populated and be a distinct number for
1049 * each A-MPDU
Johannes Berg4c298672012-07-05 11:34:31 +02001050 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_LAST_KNOWN: last subframe is known, should be set on all
1051 * subframes of a single A-MPDU
1052 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_IS_LAST: this subframe is the last subframe of the A-MPDU
1053 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_ERROR: A delimiter CRC error has been detected
1054 * on this subframe
1055 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_KNOWN: The delimiter CRC field is known (the CRC
1056 * is stored in the @ampdu_delimiter_crc field)
Sara Sharonf980ebc2016-02-24 11:49:45 +02001057 * @RX_FLAG_MIC_STRIPPED: The mic was stripped of this packet. Decryption was
1058 * done by the hardware
Emmanuel Grumbach63c361f2014-02-05 12:48:53 +02001059 * @RX_FLAG_LDPC: LDPC was used
Grzegorz Bajorski17883042015-12-11 14:39:46 +01001060 * @RX_FLAG_ONLY_MONITOR: Report frame only to monitor interfaces without
1061 * processing it in any regular way.
1062 * This is useful if drivers offload some frames but still want to report
1063 * them for sniffing purposes.
1064 * @RX_FLAG_SKIP_MONITOR: Process and report frame to all interfaces except
1065 * monitor interfaces.
1066 * This is useful if drivers offload some frames but still want to report
1067 * them for sniffing purposes.
Oleksij Rempel786677d2013-05-24 12:05:45 +02001068 * @RX_FLAG_STBC_MASK: STBC 2 bit bitmask. 1 - Nss=1, 2 - Nss=2, 3 - Nss=3
Simon Wunderlicha5e70692013-07-08 16:55:52 +02001069 * @RX_FLAG_10MHZ: 10 MHz (half channel) was used
1070 * @RX_FLAG_5MHZ: 5 MHz (quarter channel) was used
Michal Kazior0cfcefe2013-09-23 15:34:38 +02001071 * @RX_FLAG_AMSDU_MORE: Some drivers may prefer to report separate A-MSDU
1072 * subframes instead of a one huge frame for performance reasons.
1073 * All, but the last MSDU from an A-MSDU should have this flag set. E.g.
1074 * if an A-MSDU has 3 frames, the first 2 must have the flag set, while
1075 * the 3rd (last) one must not have this flag set. The flag is used to
1076 * deal with retransmission/duplication recovery properly since A-MSDU
1077 * subframes share the same sequence number. Reported subframes can be
1078 * either regular MSDU or singly A-MSDUs. Subframes must not be
1079 * interleaved with other frames.
Johannes Berg1f7bba72014-11-06 22:56:36 +01001080 * @RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_VENDOR_DATA: This frame contains vendor-specific
1081 * radiotap data in the skb->data (before the frame) as described by
1082 * the &struct ieee80211_vendor_radiotap.
Sara Sharonf631a772016-05-03 15:59:44 +03001083 * @RX_FLAG_ALLOW_SAME_PN: Allow the same PN as same packet before.
1084 * This is used for AMSDU subframes which can have the same PN as
1085 * the first subframe.
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001086 */
1087enum mac80211_rx_flags {
Johannes Berg4c298672012-07-05 11:34:31 +02001088 RX_FLAG_MMIC_ERROR = BIT(0),
1089 RX_FLAG_DECRYPTED = BIT(1),
Johannes Bergf4a0f0c2016-01-25 15:46:34 +02001090 RX_FLAG_MACTIME_PLCP_START = BIT(2),
Johannes Berg4c298672012-07-05 11:34:31 +02001091 RX_FLAG_MMIC_STRIPPED = BIT(3),
1092 RX_FLAG_IV_STRIPPED = BIT(4),
1093 RX_FLAG_FAILED_FCS_CRC = BIT(5),
1094 RX_FLAG_FAILED_PLCP_CRC = BIT(6),
Thomas Pedersenf4bda332012-11-13 10:46:27 -08001095 RX_FLAG_MACTIME_START = BIT(7),
Johannes Berg4c298672012-07-05 11:34:31 +02001096 RX_FLAG_SHORTPRE = BIT(8),
1097 RX_FLAG_HT = BIT(9),
1098 RX_FLAG_40MHZ = BIT(10),
1099 RX_FLAG_SHORT_GI = BIT(11),
1100 RX_FLAG_NO_SIGNAL_VAL = BIT(12),
1101 RX_FLAG_HT_GF = BIT(13),
1102 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DETAILS = BIT(14),
Johannes Berg981d94a2015-06-12 14:39:02 +02001103 RX_FLAG_PN_VALIDATED = BIT(15),
Sara Sharonf9cfa5f2015-12-08 16:04:33 +02001104 RX_FLAG_DUP_VALIDATED = BIT(16),
Johannes Berg4c298672012-07-05 11:34:31 +02001105 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_LAST_KNOWN = BIT(17),
1106 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_IS_LAST = BIT(18),
1107 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_ERROR = BIT(19),
1108 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_KNOWN = BIT(20),
Thomas Pedersenf4bda332012-11-13 10:46:27 -08001109 RX_FLAG_MACTIME_END = BIT(21),
Johannes Berg56146182012-11-09 15:07:02 +01001110 RX_FLAG_VHT = BIT(22),
Emmanuel Grumbach63c361f2014-02-05 12:48:53 +02001111 RX_FLAG_LDPC = BIT(23),
Grzegorz Bajorski17883042015-12-11 14:39:46 +01001112 RX_FLAG_ONLY_MONITOR = BIT(24),
1113 RX_FLAG_SKIP_MONITOR = BIT(25),
Oleksij Rempel786677d2013-05-24 12:05:45 +02001114 RX_FLAG_STBC_MASK = BIT(26) | BIT(27),
Simon Wunderlicha5e70692013-07-08 16:55:52 +02001115 RX_FLAG_10MHZ = BIT(28),
1116 RX_FLAG_5MHZ = BIT(29),
Michal Kazior0cfcefe2013-09-23 15:34:38 +02001117 RX_FLAG_AMSDU_MORE = BIT(30),
Johannes Berg1f7bba72014-11-06 22:56:36 +01001118 RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_VENDOR_DATA = BIT(31),
Sara Sharonf631a772016-05-03 15:59:44 +03001119 RX_FLAG_MIC_STRIPPED = BIT_ULL(32),
1120 RX_FLAG_ALLOW_SAME_PN = BIT_ULL(33),
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001121};
1122
Oleksij Rempel786677d2013-05-24 12:05:45 +02001123#define RX_FLAG_STBC_SHIFT 26
1124
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001125/**
Emmanuel Grumbach1b8d2422014-02-05 16:37:11 +02001126 * enum mac80211_rx_vht_flags - receive VHT flags
1127 *
1128 * These flags are used with the @vht_flag member of
1129 * &struct ieee80211_rx_status.
1130 * @RX_VHT_FLAG_80MHZ: 80 MHz was used
Emmanuel Grumbach1b8d2422014-02-05 16:37:11 +02001131 * @RX_VHT_FLAG_160MHZ: 160 MHz was used
Emmanuel Grumbachfb378c22014-03-04 10:35:25 +02001132 * @RX_VHT_FLAG_BF: packet was beamformed
Emmanuel Grumbach1b8d2422014-02-05 16:37:11 +02001133 */
Grzegorz Bajorski17883042015-12-11 14:39:46 +01001134
Emmanuel Grumbach1b8d2422014-02-05 16:37:11 +02001135enum mac80211_rx_vht_flags {
1136 RX_VHT_FLAG_80MHZ = BIT(0),
Johannes Bergf89903d2015-01-15 16:02:46 +01001137 RX_VHT_FLAG_160MHZ = BIT(1),
1138 RX_VHT_FLAG_BF = BIT(2),
Emmanuel Grumbach1b8d2422014-02-05 16:37:11 +02001139};
1140
1141/**
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001142 * struct ieee80211_rx_status - receive status
1143 *
1144 * The low-level driver should provide this information (the subset
1145 * supported by hardware) to the 802.11 code with each received
Johannes Bergf1d58c22009-06-17 13:13:00 +02001146 * frame, in the skb's control buffer (cb).
Bruno Randolf566bfe52008-05-08 19:15:40 +02001147 *
Bruno Randolfc132bec2008-02-18 11:20:51 +09001148 * @mactime: value in microseconds of the 64-bit Time Synchronization Function
1149 * (TSF) timer when the first data symbol (MPDU) arrived at the hardware.
Johannes Berg162dd6a2016-02-23 23:05:06 +02001150 * @boottime_ns: CLOCK_BOOTTIME timestamp the frame was received at, this is
1151 * needed only for beacons and probe responses that update the scan cache.
Johannes Berg8c358bc2012-05-22 22:13:05 +02001152 * @device_timestamp: arbitrary timestamp for the device, mac80211 doesn't use
1153 * it but can store it and pass it back to the driver for synchronisation
Johannes Berg8318d782008-01-24 19:38:38 +01001154 * @band: the active band when this frame was received
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001155 * @freq: frequency the radio was tuned to when receiving this frame, in MHz
Johannes Berg4352a4d2015-12-08 16:04:35 +02001156 * This field must be set for management frames, but isn't strictly needed
1157 * for data (other) frames - for those it only affects radiotap reporting.
Bruno Randolf566bfe52008-05-08 19:15:40 +02001158 * @signal: signal strength when receiving this frame, either in dBm, in dB or
1159 * unspecified depending on the hardware capabilities flags
1160 * @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_*
Felix Fietkauef0621e2013-04-22 16:29:31 +02001161 * @chains: bitmask of receive chains for which separate signal strength
1162 * values were filled.
1163 * @chain_signal: per-chain signal strength, in dBm (unlike @signal, doesn't
1164 * support dB or unspecified units)
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001165 * @antenna: antenna used
Jouni Malinen0fb8ca42008-12-12 14:38:33 +02001166 * @rate_idx: index of data rate into band's supported rates or MCS index if
Johannes Berg56146182012-11-09 15:07:02 +01001167 * HT or VHT is used (%RX_FLAG_HT/%RX_FLAG_VHT)
1168 * @vht_nss: number of streams (VHT only)
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001169 * @flag: %RX_FLAG_*
Emmanuel Grumbach1b8d2422014-02-05 16:37:11 +02001170 * @vht_flag: %RX_VHT_FLAG_*
Johannes Berg554891e2010-09-24 12:38:25 +02001171 * @rx_flags: internal RX flags for mac80211
Johannes Berg4c298672012-07-05 11:34:31 +02001172 * @ampdu_reference: A-MPDU reference number, must be a different value for
1173 * each A-MPDU but the same for each subframe within one A-MPDU
1174 * @ampdu_delimiter_crc: A-MPDU delimiter CRC
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001175 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001176struct ieee80211_rx_status {
1177 u64 mactime;
Johannes Berg162dd6a2016-02-23 23:05:06 +02001178 u64 boottime_ns;
Johannes Berg8c358bc2012-05-22 22:13:05 +02001179 u32 device_timestamp;
Johannes Berg4c298672012-07-05 11:34:31 +02001180 u32 ampdu_reference;
Sara Sharonf980ebc2016-02-24 11:49:45 +02001181 u64 flag;
Johannes Berg30f42292012-07-05 13:14:18 +02001182 u16 freq;
Emmanuel Grumbach1b8d2422014-02-05 16:37:11 +02001183 u8 vht_flag;
Johannes Berg30f42292012-07-05 13:14:18 +02001184 u8 rate_idx;
Johannes Berg56146182012-11-09 15:07:02 +01001185 u8 vht_nss;
Johannes Berg30f42292012-07-05 13:14:18 +02001186 u8 rx_flags;
1187 u8 band;
1188 u8 antenna;
1189 s8 signal;
Felix Fietkauef0621e2013-04-22 16:29:31 +02001190 u8 chains;
1191 s8 chain_signal[IEEE80211_MAX_CHAINS];
Johannes Berg4c298672012-07-05 11:34:31 +02001192 u8 ampdu_delimiter_crc;
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001193};
1194
Johannes Berg6b301cd2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001195/**
Johannes Berg1f7bba72014-11-06 22:56:36 +01001196 * struct ieee80211_vendor_radiotap - vendor radiotap data information
1197 * @present: presence bitmap for this vendor namespace
1198 * (this could be extended in the future if any vendor needs more
1199 * bits, the radiotap spec does allow for that)
1200 * @align: radiotap vendor namespace alignment. This defines the needed
1201 * alignment for the @data field below, not for the vendor namespace
1202 * description itself (which has a fixed 2-byte alignment)
1203 * Must be a power of two, and be set to at least 1!
1204 * @oui: radiotap vendor namespace OUI
1205 * @subns: radiotap vendor sub namespace
1206 * @len: radiotap vendor sub namespace skip length, if alignment is done
1207 * then that's added to this, i.e. this is only the length of the
1208 * @data field.
1209 * @pad: number of bytes of padding after the @data, this exists so that
1210 * the skb data alignment can be preserved even if the data has odd
1211 * length
1212 * @data: the actual vendor namespace data
1213 *
1214 * This struct, including the vendor data, goes into the skb->data before
1215 * the 802.11 header. It's split up in mac80211 using the align/oui/subns
1216 * data.
1217 */
1218struct ieee80211_vendor_radiotap {
1219 u32 present;
1220 u8 align;
1221 u8 oui[3];
1222 u8 subns;
1223 u8 pad;
1224 u16 len;
1225 u8 data[];
1226} __packed;
1227
1228/**
Johannes Berg6b301cd2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001229 * enum ieee80211_conf_flags - configuration flags
1230 *
1231 * Flags to define PHY configuration options
1232 *
Johannes Berg0869aea2009-10-28 10:03:35 +01001233 * @IEEE80211_CONF_MONITOR: there's a monitor interface present -- use this
1234 * to determine for example whether to calculate timestamps for packets
1235 * or not, do not use instead of filter flags!
Kalle Valoc99445b2010-01-14 13:09:21 +02001236 * @IEEE80211_CONF_PS: Enable 802.11 power save mode (managed mode only).
1237 * This is the power save mode defined by IEEE 802.11-2007 section 11.2,
1238 * meaning that the hardware still wakes up for beacons, is able to
1239 * transmit frames and receive the possible acknowledgment frames.
1240 * Not to be confused with hardware specific wakeup/sleep states,
1241 * driver is responsible for that. See the section "Powersave support"
1242 * for more.
Johannes Berg5cff20e2009-04-29 12:26:17 +02001243 * @IEEE80211_CONF_IDLE: The device is running, but idle; if the flag is set
1244 * the driver should be prepared to handle configuration requests but
1245 * may turn the device off as much as possible. Typically, this flag will
1246 * be set when an interface is set UP but not associated or scanning, but
1247 * it can also be unset in that case when monitor interfaces are active.
Felix Fietkau45521242010-07-28 02:40:49 +02001248 * @IEEE80211_CONF_OFFCHANNEL: The device is currently not on its main
1249 * operating channel.
Johannes Berg6b301cd2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001250 */
1251enum ieee80211_conf_flags {
Johannes Berg0869aea2009-10-28 10:03:35 +01001252 IEEE80211_CONF_MONITOR = (1<<0),
Johannes Bergae5eb022008-10-14 16:58:37 +02001253 IEEE80211_CONF_PS = (1<<1),
Johannes Berg5cff20e2009-04-29 12:26:17 +02001254 IEEE80211_CONF_IDLE = (1<<2),
Felix Fietkau45521242010-07-28 02:40:49 +02001255 IEEE80211_CONF_OFFCHANNEL = (1<<3),
Johannes Berg6b301cd2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001256};
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001257
Johannes Berg7a5158e2008-10-08 10:59:33 +02001258
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001259/**
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +02001260 * enum ieee80211_conf_changed - denotes which configuration changed
1261 *
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +02001262 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_LISTEN_INTERVAL: the listen interval changed
Johannes Berg0869aea2009-10-28 10:03:35 +01001263 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_MONITOR: the monitor flag changed
Johannes Berge255d5e2009-04-22 12:40:07 +02001264 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_PS: the PS flag or dynamic PS timeout changed
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +02001265 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_POWER: the TX power changed
Johannes Berg47979382009-01-07 10:13:27 +01001266 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_CHANNEL: the channel/channel_type changed
Johannes Berg9124b072008-10-14 19:17:54 +02001267 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_RETRY_LIMITS: retry limits changed
Johannes Berg5cff20e2009-04-29 12:26:17 +02001268 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_IDLE: Idle flag changed
Johannes Berg0f782312009-12-01 13:37:02 +01001269 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_SMPS: Spatial multiplexing powersave mode changed
Johannes Berg04ecd252012-09-11 14:34:12 +02001270 * Note that this is only valid if channel contexts are not used,
1271 * otherwise each channel context has the number of chains listed.
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +02001272 */
1273enum ieee80211_conf_changed {
Johannes Berg0f782312009-12-01 13:37:02 +01001274 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_SMPS = BIT(1),
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +02001275 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_LISTEN_INTERVAL = BIT(2),
Johannes Berg0869aea2009-10-28 10:03:35 +01001276 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_MONITOR = BIT(3),
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +02001277 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_PS = BIT(4),
Johannes Berge255d5e2009-04-22 12:40:07 +02001278 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_POWER = BIT(5),
1279 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_CHANNEL = BIT(6),
1280 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_RETRY_LIMITS = BIT(7),
Johannes Berg5cff20e2009-04-29 12:26:17 +02001281 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_IDLE = BIT(8),
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +02001282};
1283
1284/**
Johannes Berg0f782312009-12-01 13:37:02 +01001285 * enum ieee80211_smps_mode - spatial multiplexing power save mode
1286 *
Kalle Valo9d173fc2010-01-14 13:09:14 +02001287 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_AUTOMATIC: automatic
1288 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_OFF: off
1289 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_STATIC: static
1290 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_DYNAMIC: dynamic
1291 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_NUM_MODES: internal, don't use
Johannes Berg0f782312009-12-01 13:37:02 +01001292 */
1293enum ieee80211_smps_mode {
1294 IEEE80211_SMPS_AUTOMATIC,
1295 IEEE80211_SMPS_OFF,
1296 IEEE80211_SMPS_STATIC,
1297 IEEE80211_SMPS_DYNAMIC,
1298
1299 /* keep last */
1300 IEEE80211_SMPS_NUM_MODES,
1301};
1302
1303/**
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001304 * struct ieee80211_conf - configuration of the device
1305 *
1306 * This struct indicates how the driver shall configure the hardware.
1307 *
Johannes Berg04fe2032009-04-22 18:44:37 +02001308 * @flags: configuration flags defined above
1309 *
Tomas Winklerea95bba2008-07-18 13:53:00 +08001310 * @listen_interval: listen interval in units of beacon interval
Johannes Berg56007a02010-01-26 14:19:52 +01001311 * @ps_dtim_period: The DTIM period of the AP we're connected to, for use
1312 * in power saving. Power saving will not be enabled until a beacon
1313 * has been received and the DTIM period is known.
Johannes Berg04fe2032009-04-22 18:44:37 +02001314 * @dynamic_ps_timeout: The dynamic powersave timeout (in ms), see the
1315 * powersave documentation below. This variable is valid only when
1316 * the CONF_PS flag is set.
1317 *
Johannes Berg1ea6f9c2012-10-24 10:59:25 +02001318 * @power_level: requested transmit power (in dBm), backward compatibility
1319 * value only that is set to the minimum of all interfaces
Johannes Berg04fe2032009-04-22 18:44:37 +02001320 *
Karl Beldan675a0b02013-03-25 16:26:57 +01001321 * @chandef: the channel definition to tune to
Simon Wunderlich164eb022013-02-08 18:16:20 +01001322 * @radar_enabled: whether radar detection is enabled
Johannes Berg04fe2032009-04-22 18:44:37 +02001323 *
Johannes Berg9124b072008-10-14 19:17:54 +02001324 * @long_frame_max_tx_count: Maximum number of transmissions for a "long" frame
Johannes Bergad24b0d2013-07-05 11:53:28 +02001325 * (a frame not RTS protected), called "dot11LongRetryLimit" in 802.11,
1326 * but actually means the number of transmissions not the number of retries
Johannes Berg9124b072008-10-14 19:17:54 +02001327 * @short_frame_max_tx_count: Maximum number of transmissions for a "short"
Johannes Bergad24b0d2013-07-05 11:53:28 +02001328 * frame, called "dot11ShortRetryLimit" in 802.11, but actually means the
1329 * number of transmissions not the number of retries
Johannes Berg0f782312009-12-01 13:37:02 +01001330 *
1331 * @smps_mode: spatial multiplexing powersave mode; note that
1332 * %IEEE80211_SMPS_STATIC is used when the device is not
Johannes Berg04ecd252012-09-11 14:34:12 +02001333 * configured for an HT channel.
1334 * Note that this is only valid if channel contexts are not used,
1335 * otherwise each channel context has the number of chains listed.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001336 */
1337struct ieee80211_conf {
Johannes Berg6b301cd2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001338 u32 flags;
Juuso Oikarinenff616382010-06-09 09:51:52 +03001339 int power_level, dynamic_ps_timeout;
Ron Rindjunsky10816d42007-11-26 16:14:30 +02001340
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +02001341 u16 listen_interval;
Johannes Berg56007a02010-01-26 14:19:52 +01001342 u8 ps_dtim_period;
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +02001343
Johannes Berg9124b072008-10-14 19:17:54 +02001344 u8 long_frame_max_tx_count, short_frame_max_tx_count;
1345
Karl Beldan675a0b02013-03-25 16:26:57 +01001346 struct cfg80211_chan_def chandef;
Simon Wunderlich164eb022013-02-08 18:16:20 +01001347 bool radar_enabled;
Johannes Berg0f782312009-12-01 13:37:02 +01001348 enum ieee80211_smps_mode smps_mode;
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001349};
1350
1351/**
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02001352 * struct ieee80211_channel_switch - holds the channel switch data
1353 *
1354 * The information provided in this structure is required for channel switch
1355 * operation.
1356 *
1357 * @timestamp: value in microseconds of the 64-bit Time Synchronization
1358 * Function (TSF) timer when the frame containing the channel switch
1359 * announcement was received. This is simply the rx.mactime parameter
1360 * the driver passed into mac80211.
Luciano Coelho2ba45382014-10-08 09:48:35 +03001361 * @device_timestamp: arbitrary timestamp for the device, this is the
1362 * rx.device_timestamp parameter the driver passed to mac80211.
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02001363 * @block_tx: Indicates whether transmission must be blocked before the
1364 * scheduled channel switch, as indicated by the AP.
Johannes Berg85220d72013-03-25 18:29:27 +01001365 * @chandef: the new channel to switch to
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02001366 * @count: the number of TBTT's until the channel switch event
1367 */
1368struct ieee80211_channel_switch {
1369 u64 timestamp;
Luciano Coelho2ba45382014-10-08 09:48:35 +03001370 u32 device_timestamp;
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02001371 bool block_tx;
Johannes Berg85220d72013-03-25 18:29:27 +01001372 struct cfg80211_chan_def chandef;
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02001373 u8 count;
1374};
1375
1376/**
Johannes Bergc1288b12012-01-19 09:29:57 +01001377 * enum ieee80211_vif_flags - virtual interface flags
1378 *
1379 * @IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER: the device performs beacon filtering
1380 * on this virtual interface to avoid unnecessary CPU wakeups
Johannes Bergea086352012-01-19 09:29:58 +01001381 * @IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_CQM_RSSI: the device can do connection quality
1382 * monitoring on this virtual interface -- i.e. it can monitor
1383 * connection quality related parameters, such as the RSSI level and
1384 * provide notifications if configured trigger levels are reached.
Johannes Berg848955c2014-11-11 12:48:42 +01001385 * @IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_UAPSD: The device can do U-APSD for this
1386 * interface. This flag should be set during interface addition,
1387 * but may be set/cleared as late as authentication to an AP. It is
1388 * only valid for managed/station mode interfaces.
Janusz.Dziedzic@tieto.comb115b972015-10-27 08:38:40 +01001389 * @IEEE80211_VIF_GET_NOA_UPDATE: request to handle NOA attributes
1390 * and send P2P_PS notification to the driver if NOA changed, even
1391 * this is not pure P2P vif.
Johannes Bergc1288b12012-01-19 09:29:57 +01001392 */
1393enum ieee80211_vif_flags {
1394 IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER = BIT(0),
Johannes Bergea086352012-01-19 09:29:58 +01001395 IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_CQM_RSSI = BIT(1),
Johannes Berg848955c2014-11-11 12:48:42 +01001396 IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_UAPSD = BIT(2),
Janusz.Dziedzic@tieto.comb115b972015-10-27 08:38:40 +01001397 IEEE80211_VIF_GET_NOA_UPDATE = BIT(3),
Johannes Bergc1288b12012-01-19 09:29:57 +01001398};
1399
1400/**
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01001401 * struct ieee80211_vif - per-interface data
1402 *
1403 * Data in this structure is continually present for driver
1404 * use during the life of a virtual interface.
1405 *
Johannes Berg51fb61e2007-12-19 01:31:27 +01001406 * @type: type of this virtual interface
Johannes Bergbda39332008-10-11 01:51:51 +02001407 * @bss_conf: BSS configuration for this interface, either our own
1408 * or the BSS we're associated to
Johannes Berg47846c92009-11-25 17:46:19 +01001409 * @addr: address of this interface
Johannes Berg2ca27bc2010-09-16 14:58:23 +02001410 * @p2p: indicates whether this AP or STA interface is a p2p
1411 * interface, i.e. a GO or p2p-sta respectively
Michal Kazior59af6922014-04-09 15:10:59 +02001412 * @csa_active: marks whether a channel switch is going on. Internally it is
1413 * write-protected by sdata_lock and local->mtx so holding either is fine
1414 * for read access.
Sara Sharonb5a33d52016-02-16 12:48:18 +02001415 * @mu_mimo_owner: indicates interface owns MU-MIMO capability
Johannes Bergc1288b12012-01-19 09:29:57 +01001416 * @driver_flags: flags/capabilities the driver has for this interface,
1417 * these need to be set (or cleared) when the interface is added
1418 * or, if supported by the driver, the interface type is changed
1419 * at runtime, mac80211 will never touch this field
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +02001420 * @hw_queue: hardware queue for each AC
1421 * @cab_queue: content-after-beacon (DTIM beacon really) queue, AP mode only
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +02001422 * @chanctx_conf: The channel context this interface is assigned to, or %NULL
1423 * when it is not assigned. This pointer is RCU-protected due to the TX
1424 * path needing to access it; even though the netdev carrier will always
1425 * be off when it is %NULL there can still be races and packets could be
1426 * processed after it switches back to %NULL.
Stanislaw Gruszkaddbfe862013-03-08 14:46:14 +01001427 * @debugfs_dir: debugfs dentry, can be used by drivers to create own per
Johannes Bergad24b0d2013-07-05 11:53:28 +02001428 * interface debug files. Note that it will be NULL for the virtual
Stanislaw Gruszkaddbfe862013-03-08 14:46:14 +01001429 * monitor interface (if that is requested.)
Andrei Otcheretianski1b09b552015-08-15 22:39:50 +03001430 * @probe_req_reg: probe requests should be reported to mac80211 for this
1431 * interface.
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01001432 * @drv_priv: data area for driver use, will always be aligned to
1433 * sizeof(void *).
Felix Fietkauba8c3d62015-03-27 21:30:37 +01001434 * @txq: the multicast data TX queue (if driver uses the TXQ abstraction)
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01001435 */
1436struct ieee80211_vif {
Johannes Berg05c914f2008-09-11 00:01:58 +02001437 enum nl80211_iftype type;
Johannes Bergbda39332008-10-11 01:51:51 +02001438 struct ieee80211_bss_conf bss_conf;
Johannes Berg47846c92009-11-25 17:46:19 +01001439 u8 addr[ETH_ALEN];
Johannes Berg2ca27bc2010-09-16 14:58:23 +02001440 bool p2p;
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +02001441 bool csa_active;
Sara Sharonb5a33d52016-02-16 12:48:18 +02001442 bool mu_mimo_owner;
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +02001443
1444 u8 cab_queue;
1445 u8 hw_queue[IEEE80211_NUM_ACS];
1446
Felix Fietkauba8c3d62015-03-27 21:30:37 +01001447 struct ieee80211_txq *txq;
1448
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +02001449 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf __rcu *chanctx_conf;
1450
Johannes Bergc1288b12012-01-19 09:29:57 +01001451 u32 driver_flags;
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +02001452
Stanislaw Gruszkaddbfe862013-03-08 14:46:14 +01001453#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_DEBUGFS
1454 struct dentry *debugfs_dir;
1455#endif
1456
Andrei Otcheretianski1b09b552015-08-15 22:39:50 +03001457 unsigned int probe_req_reg;
1458
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01001459 /* must be last */
Johannes Berg1c06ef92012-12-28 12:22:02 +01001460 u8 drv_priv[0] __aligned(sizeof(void *));
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01001461};
1462
Johannes Berg902acc72008-02-23 15:17:19 +01001463static inline bool ieee80211_vif_is_mesh(struct ieee80211_vif *vif)
1464{
1465#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_MESH
Johannes Berg05c914f2008-09-11 00:01:58 +02001466 return vif->type == NL80211_IFTYPE_MESH_POINT;
Johannes Berg902acc72008-02-23 15:17:19 +01001467#endif
1468 return false;
1469}
1470
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01001471/**
Johannes Bergad7e7182013-11-13 13:37:47 +01001472 * wdev_to_ieee80211_vif - return a vif struct from a wdev
1473 * @wdev: the wdev to get the vif for
1474 *
1475 * This can be used by mac80211 drivers with direct cfg80211 APIs
1476 * (like the vendor commands) that get a wdev.
1477 *
1478 * Note that this function may return %NULL if the given wdev isn't
1479 * associated with a vif that the driver knows about (e.g. monitor
1480 * or AP_VLAN interfaces.)
1481 */
1482struct ieee80211_vif *wdev_to_ieee80211_vif(struct wireless_dev *wdev);
1483
1484/**
Emmanuel Grumbachdc5a1ad2015-03-12 08:53:24 +02001485 * ieee80211_vif_to_wdev - return a wdev struct from a vif
1486 * @vif: the vif to get the wdev for
1487 *
1488 * This can be used by mac80211 drivers with direct cfg80211 APIs
1489 * (like the vendor commands) that needs to get the wdev for a vif.
1490 *
1491 * Note that this function may return %NULL if the given wdev isn't
1492 * associated with a vif that the driver knows about (e.g. monitor
1493 * or AP_VLAN interfaces.)
1494 */
1495struct wireless_dev *ieee80211_vif_to_wdev(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
1496
1497/**
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001498 * enum ieee80211_key_flags - key flags
1499 *
1500 * These flags are used for communication about keys between the driver
1501 * and mac80211, with the @flags parameter of &struct ieee80211_key_conf.
1502 *
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001503 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV: This flag should be set by the
1504 * driver to indicate that it requires IV generation for this
Ido Yarivdb128472015-01-06 08:39:02 -05001505 * particular key. Setting this flag does not necessarily mean that SKBs
1506 * will have sufficient tailroom for ICV or MIC.
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001507 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIC: This flag should be set by
1508 * the driver for a TKIP key if it requires Michael MIC
1509 * generation in software.
Ivo van Doornc6adbd22008-04-17 21:11:18 +02001510 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PAIRWISE: Set by mac80211, this flag indicates
1511 * that the key is pairwise rather then a shared key.
Johannes Berge548c492012-09-04 17:08:23 +02001512 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_SW_MGMT_TX: This flag should be set by the driver for a
Jouni Malinen00b9cfa2015-01-24 19:52:06 +02001513 * CCMP/GCMP key if it requires CCMP/GCMP encryption of management frames
1514 * (MFP) to be done in software.
Arik Nemtsov077a9152011-10-23 08:21:41 +02001515 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PUT_IV_SPACE: This flag should be set by the driver
Janusz.Dziedzic@tieto.comee701082012-05-09 08:11:20 +03001516 * if space should be prepared for the IV, but the IV
Arik Nemtsov077a9152011-10-23 08:21:41 +02001517 * itself should not be generated. Do not set together with
Ido Yarivdb128472015-01-06 08:39:02 -05001518 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV on the same key. Setting this flag does
1519 * not necessarily mean that SKBs will have sufficient tailroom for ICV or
1520 * MIC.
Johannes Berge548c492012-09-04 17:08:23 +02001521 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RX_MGMT: This key will be used to decrypt received
1522 * management frames. The flag can help drivers that have a hardware
1523 * crypto implementation that doesn't deal with management frames
1524 * properly by allowing them to not upload the keys to hardware and
1525 * fall back to software crypto. Note that this flag deals only with
1526 * RX, if your crypto engine can't deal with TX you can also set the
1527 * %IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_SW_MGMT_TX flag to encrypt such frames in SW.
Marek Kwaczynski17d38fa2014-04-14 11:27:21 +02001528 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV_MGMT: This flag should be set by the
Jouni Malinen00b9cfa2015-01-24 19:52:06 +02001529 * driver for a CCMP/GCMP key to indicate that is requires IV generation
Marek Kwaczynski17d38fa2014-04-14 11:27:21 +02001530 * only for managment frames (MFP).
Ido Yarivdb128472015-01-06 08:39:02 -05001531 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RESERVE_TAILROOM: This flag should be set by the
1532 * driver for a key to indicate that sufficient tailroom must always
1533 * be reserved for ICV or MIC, even when HW encryption is enabled.
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001534 */
1535enum ieee80211_key_flags {
Marek Kwaczynski17d38fa2014-04-14 11:27:21 +02001536 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV_MGMT = BIT(0),
1537 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV = BIT(1),
1538 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIC = BIT(2),
1539 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PAIRWISE = BIT(3),
1540 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_SW_MGMT_TX = BIT(4),
1541 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PUT_IV_SPACE = BIT(5),
1542 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RX_MGMT = BIT(6),
Ido Yarivdb128472015-01-06 08:39:02 -05001543 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RESERVE_TAILROOM = BIT(7),
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001544};
1545
1546/**
1547 * struct ieee80211_key_conf - key information
1548 *
1549 * This key information is given by mac80211 to the driver by
1550 * the set_key() callback in &struct ieee80211_ops.
1551 *
1552 * @hw_key_idx: To be set by the driver, this is the key index the driver
1553 * wants to be given when a frame is transmitted and needs to be
Johannes Berg6a7664d2007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001554 * encrypted in hardware.
Johannes Berg97359d12010-08-10 09:46:38 +02001555 * @cipher: The key's cipher suite selector.
Eliad Pellerf8079d42016-02-14 13:56:35 +02001556 * @tx_pn: PN used for TX keys, may be used by the driver as well if it
1557 * needs to do software PN assignment by itself (e.g. due to TSO)
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001558 * @flags: key flags, see &enum ieee80211_key_flags.
1559 * @keyidx: the key index (0-3)
1560 * @keylen: key material length
Luis R. Rodriguezffd78912008-06-21 10:02:46 -04001561 * @key: key material. For ALG_TKIP the key is encoded as a 256-bit (32 byte)
1562 * data block:
1563 * - Temporal Encryption Key (128 bits)
1564 * - Temporal Authenticator Tx MIC Key (64 bits)
1565 * - Temporal Authenticator Rx MIC Key (64 bits)
Johannes Bergdc822b52008-12-29 12:55:09 +01001566 * @icv_len: The ICV length for this key type
1567 * @iv_len: The IV length for this key type
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001568 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001569struct ieee80211_key_conf {
Johannes Bergdb388a52015-06-01 15:36:51 +02001570 atomic64_t tx_pn;
Johannes Berg97359d12010-08-10 09:46:38 +02001571 u32 cipher;
Felix Fietkau76708de2008-10-05 18:02:48 +02001572 u8 icv_len;
1573 u8 iv_len;
Johannes Berg6a7664d2007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001574 u8 hw_key_idx;
Johannes Berg11a843b2007-08-28 17:01:55 -04001575 u8 flags;
Johannes Berg11a843b2007-08-28 17:01:55 -04001576 s8 keyidx;
Johannes Berg11a843b2007-08-28 17:01:55 -04001577 u8 keylen;
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001578 u8 key[0];
1579};
1580
Johannes Berga31cf1c2015-04-20 18:21:58 +02001581#define IEEE80211_MAX_PN_LEN 16
1582
Eliad Pellerf8079d42016-02-14 13:56:35 +02001583#define TKIP_PN_TO_IV16(pn) ((u16)(pn & 0xffff))
1584#define TKIP_PN_TO_IV32(pn) ((u32)((pn >> 16) & 0xffffffff))
1585
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001586/**
Johannes Berg9352c192015-04-20 18:12:41 +02001587 * struct ieee80211_key_seq - key sequence counter
1588 *
1589 * @tkip: TKIP data, containing IV32 and IV16 in host byte order
1590 * @ccmp: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian,
1591 * reverse order than in packet)
1592 * @aes_cmac: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian,
1593 * reverse order than in packet)
1594 * @aes_gmac: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian,
1595 * reverse order than in packet)
1596 * @gcmp: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian,
1597 * reverse order than in packet)
Johannes Berga31cf1c2015-04-20 18:21:58 +02001598 * @hw: data for HW-only (e.g. cipher scheme) keys
Johannes Berg9352c192015-04-20 18:12:41 +02001599 */
1600struct ieee80211_key_seq {
1601 union {
1602 struct {
1603 u32 iv32;
1604 u16 iv16;
1605 } tkip;
1606 struct {
1607 u8 pn[6];
1608 } ccmp;
1609 struct {
1610 u8 pn[6];
1611 } aes_cmac;
1612 struct {
1613 u8 pn[6];
1614 } aes_gmac;
1615 struct {
1616 u8 pn[6];
1617 } gcmp;
Johannes Berga31cf1c2015-04-20 18:21:58 +02001618 struct {
1619 u8 seq[IEEE80211_MAX_PN_LEN];
1620 u8 seq_len;
1621 } hw;
Johannes Berg9352c192015-04-20 18:12:41 +02001622 };
1623};
1624
1625/**
Max Stepanov2475b1cc2013-03-24 14:23:27 +02001626 * struct ieee80211_cipher_scheme - cipher scheme
1627 *
1628 * This structure contains a cipher scheme information defining
1629 * the secure packet crypto handling.
1630 *
1631 * @cipher: a cipher suite selector
1632 * @iftype: a cipher iftype bit mask indicating an allowed cipher usage
1633 * @hdr_len: a length of a security header used the cipher
1634 * @pn_len: a length of a packet number in the security header
1635 * @pn_off: an offset of pn from the beginning of the security header
1636 * @key_idx_off: an offset of key index byte in the security header
1637 * @key_idx_mask: a bit mask of key_idx bits
1638 * @key_idx_shift: a bit shift needed to get key_idx
1639 * key_idx value calculation:
1640 * (sec_header_base[key_idx_off] & key_idx_mask) >> key_idx_shift
1641 * @mic_len: a mic length in bytes
1642 */
1643struct ieee80211_cipher_scheme {
1644 u32 cipher;
1645 u16 iftype;
1646 u8 hdr_len;
1647 u8 pn_len;
1648 u8 pn_off;
1649 u8 key_idx_off;
1650 u8 key_idx_mask;
1651 u8 key_idx_shift;
1652 u8 mic_len;
1653};
1654
1655/**
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001656 * enum set_key_cmd - key command
1657 *
1658 * Used with the set_key() callback in &struct ieee80211_ops, this
1659 * indicates whether a key is being removed or added.
1660 *
1661 * @SET_KEY: a key is set
1662 * @DISABLE_KEY: a key must be disabled
1663 */
Johannes Bergea49c352007-09-18 17:29:21 -04001664enum set_key_cmd {
Johannes Berg11a843b2007-08-28 17:01:55 -04001665 SET_KEY, DISABLE_KEY,
Johannes Bergea49c352007-09-18 17:29:21 -04001666};
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001667
Tomas Winkler478f8d22007-09-30 13:52:37 +02001668/**
Johannes Bergf09603a2012-01-20 13:55:21 +01001669 * enum ieee80211_sta_state - station state
1670 *
1671 * @IEEE80211_STA_NOTEXIST: station doesn't exist at all,
1672 * this is a special state for add/remove transitions
1673 * @IEEE80211_STA_NONE: station exists without special state
1674 * @IEEE80211_STA_AUTH: station is authenticated
1675 * @IEEE80211_STA_ASSOC: station is associated
1676 * @IEEE80211_STA_AUTHORIZED: station is authorized (802.1X)
1677 */
1678enum ieee80211_sta_state {
1679 /* NOTE: These need to be ordered correctly! */
1680 IEEE80211_STA_NOTEXIST,
1681 IEEE80211_STA_NONE,
1682 IEEE80211_STA_AUTH,
1683 IEEE80211_STA_ASSOC,
1684 IEEE80211_STA_AUTHORIZED,
1685};
1686
1687/**
Johannes Berge1a0c6b2013-02-07 11:47:44 +01001688 * enum ieee80211_sta_rx_bandwidth - station RX bandwidth
1689 * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_20: station can only receive 20 MHz
1690 * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_40: station can receive up to 40 MHz
1691 * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_80: station can receive up to 80 MHz
1692 * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_160: station can receive up to 160 MHz
1693 * (including 80+80 MHz)
1694 *
1695 * Implementation note: 20 must be zero to be initialized
1696 * correctly, the values must be sorted.
1697 */
1698enum ieee80211_sta_rx_bandwidth {
1699 IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_20 = 0,
1700 IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_40,
1701 IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_80,
1702 IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_160,
1703};
1704
1705/**
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +02001706 * struct ieee80211_sta_rates - station rate selection table
1707 *
1708 * @rcu_head: RCU head used for freeing the table on update
Robert P. J. Day03f831a2013-05-02 07:15:09 -04001709 * @rate: transmit rates/flags to be used by default.
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +02001710 * Overriding entries per-packet is possible by using cb tx control.
1711 */
1712struct ieee80211_sta_rates {
1713 struct rcu_head rcu_head;
1714 struct {
1715 s8 idx;
1716 u8 count;
1717 u8 count_cts;
1718 u8 count_rts;
1719 u16 flags;
1720 } rate[IEEE80211_TX_RATE_TABLE_SIZE];
1721};
1722
1723/**
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02001724 * struct ieee80211_sta - station table entry
1725 *
1726 * A station table entry represents a station we are possibly
1727 * communicating with. Since stations are RCU-managed in
1728 * mac80211, any ieee80211_sta pointer you get access to must
1729 * either be protected by rcu_read_lock() explicitly or implicitly,
1730 * or you must take good care to not use such a pointer after a
Johannes Berg34e89502010-02-03 13:59:58 +01001731 * call to your sta_remove callback that removed it.
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02001732 *
1733 * @addr: MAC address
1734 * @aid: AID we assigned to the station if we're an AP
Johannes Berg323ce792008-09-11 02:45:11 +02001735 * @supp_rates: Bitmap of supported rates (per band)
Johannes Berg55d942f2013-03-01 13:07:48 +01001736 * @ht_cap: HT capabilities of this STA; restricted to our own capabilities
1737 * @vht_cap: VHT capabilities of this STA; restricted to our own capabilities
Maxim Altshul480dd462016-08-22 17:14:04 +03001738 * @max_rx_aggregation_subframes: maximal amount of frames in a single AMPDU
1739 * that this station is allowed to transmit to us.
1740 * Can be modified by driver.
Johannes Berg527871d2015-03-21 08:09:55 +01001741 * @wme: indicates whether the STA supports QoS/WME (if local devices does,
1742 * otherwise always false)
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02001743 * @drv_priv: data area for driver use, will always be aligned to
1744 * sizeof(void *), size is determined in hw information.
Eliad Peller910868d2011-09-11 09:46:55 +03001745 * @uapsd_queues: bitmap of queues configured for uapsd. Only valid
1746 * if wme is supported.
1747 * @max_sp: max Service Period. Only valid if wme is supported.
Johannes Berge1a0c6b2013-02-07 11:47:44 +01001748 * @bandwidth: current bandwidth the station can receive with
Johannes Berg8921d042012-12-27 18:26:42 +01001749 * @rx_nss: in HT/VHT, the maximum number of spatial streams the
1750 * station can receive at the moment, changed by operating mode
1751 * notifications and capabilities. The value is only valid after
1752 * the station moves to associated state.
Johannes Bergaf0ed692013-02-12 14:21:00 +01001753 * @smps_mode: current SMPS mode (off, static or dynamic)
Robert P. J. Day03f831a2013-05-02 07:15:09 -04001754 * @rates: rate control selection table
Arik Nemtsov0c4972c2014-05-01 10:17:27 +03001755 * @tdls: indicates whether the STA is a TDLS peer
Arik Nemtsov8b941482014-10-22 12:32:48 +03001756 * @tdls_initiator: indicates the STA is an initiator of the TDLS link. Only
1757 * valid if the STA is a TDLS peer in the first place.
Tamizh chelvam93f04902015-10-07 10:40:04 +05301758 * @mfp: indicates whether the STA uses management frame protection or not.
Emmanuel Grumbach506bcfa2015-12-13 15:41:05 +02001759 * @max_amsdu_subframes: indicates the maximal number of MSDUs in a single
1760 * A-MSDU. Taken from the Extended Capabilities element. 0 means
1761 * unlimited.
1762 * @max_amsdu_len: indicates the maximal length of an A-MSDU in bytes. This
1763 * field is always valid for packets with a VHT preamble. For packets
1764 * with a HT preamble, additional limits apply:
1765 * + If the skb is transmitted as part of a BA agreement, the
1766 * A-MSDU maximal size is min(max_amsdu_len, 4065) bytes.
1767 * + If the skb is not part of a BA aggreement, the A-MSDU maximal
1768 * size is min(max_amsdu_len, 7935) bytes.
1769 * Both additional HT limits must be enforced by the low level driver.
1770 * This is defined by the spec (IEEE 802.11-2012 section 8.3.2.2 NOTE 2).
Ayala Beker52cfa1d2016-03-17 15:41:39 +02001771 * @support_p2p_ps: indicates whether the STA supports P2P PS mechanism or not.
Felix Fietkau6e0456b2016-03-03 22:59:00 +01001772 * @max_rc_amsdu_len: Maximum A-MSDU size in bytes recommended by rate control.
Felix Fietkauba8c3d62015-03-27 21:30:37 +01001773 * @txq: per-TID data TX queues (if driver uses the TXQ abstraction)
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02001774 */
1775struct ieee80211_sta {
Johannes Berg57fbcce2016-04-12 15:56:15 +02001776 u32 supp_rates[NUM_NL80211_BANDS];
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02001777 u8 addr[ETH_ALEN];
1778 u16 aid;
Johannes Bergd9fe60d2008-10-09 12:13:49 +02001779 struct ieee80211_sta_ht_cap ht_cap;
Mahesh Palivela818255e2012-10-10 11:33:04 +00001780 struct ieee80211_sta_vht_cap vht_cap;
Maxim Altshul480dd462016-08-22 17:14:04 +03001781 u8 max_rx_aggregation_subframes;
Arik Nemtsov39df6002011-06-27 23:58:45 +03001782 bool wme;
Eliad Peller9533b4a2011-08-23 14:37:47 +03001783 u8 uapsd_queues;
1784 u8 max_sp;
Johannes Berg8921d042012-12-27 18:26:42 +01001785 u8 rx_nss;
Johannes Berge1a0c6b2013-02-07 11:47:44 +01001786 enum ieee80211_sta_rx_bandwidth bandwidth;
Johannes Bergaf0ed692013-02-12 14:21:00 +01001787 enum ieee80211_smps_mode smps_mode;
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +02001788 struct ieee80211_sta_rates __rcu *rates;
Arik Nemtsov0c4972c2014-05-01 10:17:27 +03001789 bool tdls;
Arik Nemtsov8b941482014-10-22 12:32:48 +03001790 bool tdls_initiator;
Tamizh chelvam93f04902015-10-07 10:40:04 +05301791 bool mfp;
Emmanuel Grumbach506bcfa2015-12-13 15:41:05 +02001792 u8 max_amsdu_subframes;
1793 u16 max_amsdu_len;
Ayala Beker52cfa1d2016-03-17 15:41:39 +02001794 bool support_p2p_ps;
Felix Fietkau6e0456b2016-03-03 22:59:00 +01001795 u16 max_rc_amsdu_len;
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02001796
Felix Fietkauba8c3d62015-03-27 21:30:37 +01001797 struct ieee80211_txq *txq[IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS];
1798
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02001799 /* must be last */
Johannes Berg1c06ef92012-12-28 12:22:02 +01001800 u8 drv_priv[0] __aligned(sizeof(void *));
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02001801};
1802
1803/**
Tomas Winkler478f8d22007-09-30 13:52:37 +02001804 * enum sta_notify_cmd - sta notify command
1805 *
1806 * Used with the sta_notify() callback in &struct ieee80211_ops, this
Sujith38a6cc72010-05-19 11:32:30 +05301807 * indicates if an associated station made a power state transition.
Tomas Winkler478f8d22007-09-30 13:52:37 +02001808 *
Christian Lamparter4571d3b2008-11-30 00:48:41 +01001809 * @STA_NOTIFY_SLEEP: a station is now sleeping
1810 * @STA_NOTIFY_AWAKE: a sleeping station woke up
1811 */
Christian Lamparter89fad572008-12-09 16:28:06 +01001812enum sta_notify_cmd {
Christian Lamparter4571d3b2008-11-30 00:48:41 +01001813 STA_NOTIFY_SLEEP, STA_NOTIFY_AWAKE,
1814};
1815
1816/**
Thomas Huehn36323f82012-07-23 21:33:42 +02001817 * struct ieee80211_tx_control - TX control data
1818 *
1819 * @sta: station table entry, this sta pointer may be NULL and
1820 * it is not allowed to copy the pointer, due to RCU.
1821 */
1822struct ieee80211_tx_control {
1823 struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
1824};
1825
1826/**
Felix Fietkauba8c3d62015-03-27 21:30:37 +01001827 * struct ieee80211_txq - Software intermediate tx queue
1828 *
1829 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
1830 * @sta: station table entry, %NULL for per-vif queue
1831 * @tid: the TID for this queue (unused for per-vif queue)
1832 * @ac: the AC for this queue
Johannes Bergf8bdbb52015-05-20 15:04:53 +02001833 * @drv_priv: driver private area, sized by hw->txq_data_size
Felix Fietkauba8c3d62015-03-27 21:30:37 +01001834 *
1835 * The driver can obtain packets from this queue by calling
1836 * ieee80211_tx_dequeue().
1837 */
1838struct ieee80211_txq {
1839 struct ieee80211_vif *vif;
1840 struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
1841 u8 tid;
1842 u8 ac;
1843
1844 /* must be last */
1845 u8 drv_priv[0] __aligned(sizeof(void *));
1846};
1847
1848/**
Johannes Berg1bc08262007-09-18 17:29:15 -04001849 * enum ieee80211_hw_flags - hardware flags
1850 *
1851 * These flags are used to indicate hardware capabilities to
1852 * the stack. Generally, flags here should have their meaning
1853 * done in a way that the simplest hardware doesn't need setting
1854 * any particular flags. There are some exceptions to this rule,
1855 * however, so you are advised to review these flags carefully.
1856 *
Johannes Bergaf65cd962009-11-17 18:18:36 +01001857 * @IEEE80211_HW_HAS_RATE_CONTROL:
1858 * The hardware or firmware includes rate control, and cannot be
1859 * controlled by the stack. As such, no rate control algorithm
1860 * should be instantiated, and the TX rate reported to userspace
1861 * will be taken from the TX status instead of the rate control
1862 * algorithm.
1863 * Note that this requires that the driver implement a number of
1864 * callbacks so it has the correct information, it needs to have
1865 * the @set_rts_threshold callback and must look at the BSS config
1866 * @use_cts_prot for G/N protection, @use_short_slot for slot
1867 * timing in 2.4 GHz and @use_short_preamble for preambles for
1868 * CCK frames.
1869 *
Johannes Berg1bc08262007-09-18 17:29:15 -04001870 * @IEEE80211_HW_RX_INCLUDES_FCS:
1871 * Indicates that received frames passed to the stack include
1872 * the FCS at the end.
1873 *
1874 * @IEEE80211_HW_HOST_BROADCAST_PS_BUFFERING:
1875 * Some wireless LAN chipsets buffer broadcast/multicast frames
1876 * for power saving stations in the hardware/firmware and others
1877 * rely on the host system for such buffering. This option is used
1878 * to configure the IEEE 802.11 upper layer to buffer broadcast and
1879 * multicast frames when there are power saving stations so that
Luis R. Rodriguez546c80c92008-08-14 11:43:20 -07001880 * the driver can fetch them with ieee80211_get_buffered_bc().
Johannes Berg1bc08262007-09-18 17:29:15 -04001881 *
Bruno Randolf566bfe52008-05-08 19:15:40 +02001882 * @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_UNSPEC:
1883 * Hardware can provide signal values but we don't know its units. We
1884 * expect values between 0 and @max_signal.
1885 * If possible please provide dB or dBm instead.
1886 *
Bruno Randolf566bfe52008-05-08 19:15:40 +02001887 * @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_DBM:
1888 * Hardware gives signal values in dBm, decibel difference from
1889 * one milliwatt. This is the preferred method since it is standardized
1890 * between different devices. @max_signal does not need to be set.
1891 *
Tomas Winkler06ff47b2008-06-18 17:53:44 +03001892 * @IEEE80211_HW_SPECTRUM_MGMT:
1893 * Hardware supports spectrum management defined in 802.11h
1894 * Measurement, Channel Switch, Quieting, TPC
Sujith8b30b1f2008-10-24 09:55:27 +05301895 *
1896 * @IEEE80211_HW_AMPDU_AGGREGATION:
1897 * Hardware supports 11n A-MPDU aggregation.
Kalle Valo520eb822008-12-18 23:35:27 +02001898 *
Johannes Berg4be8c382009-01-07 18:28:20 +01001899 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS:
1900 * Hardware has power save support (i.e. can go to sleep).
1901 *
1902 * @IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK:
1903 * Hardware requires nullfunc frame handling in stack, implies
1904 * stack support for dynamic PS.
1905 *
1906 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_DYNAMIC_PS:
1907 * Hardware has support for dynamic PS.
Jouni Malinen4375d082009-01-08 13:32:11 +02001908 *
1909 * @IEEE80211_HW_MFP_CAPABLE:
1910 * Hardware supports management frame protection (MFP, IEEE 802.11w).
Kalle Valo04de8382009-03-22 21:57:35 +02001911 *
Vivek Natarajan375177b2010-02-09 14:50:28 +05301912 * @IEEE80211_HW_REPORTS_TX_ACK_STATUS:
1913 * Hardware can provide ack status reports of Tx frames to
1914 * the stack.
1915 *
Juuso Oikarinen1e4dcd02010-03-19 07:14:53 +02001916 * @IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR:
Johannes Bergad24b0d2013-07-05 11:53:28 +02001917 * The hardware performs its own connection monitoring, including
1918 * periodic keep-alives to the AP and probing the AP on beacon loss.
Juuso Oikarinena97c13c2010-03-23 09:02:34 +02001919 *
Emmanuel Grumbachc65dd142012-12-12 10:12:24 +02001920 * @IEEE80211_HW_NEED_DTIM_BEFORE_ASSOC:
1921 * This device needs to get data from beacon before association (i.e.
1922 * dtim_period).
Johannes Berge31b8212010-10-05 19:39:30 +02001923 *
1924 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PER_STA_GTK: The device's crypto engine supports
1925 * per-station GTKs as used by IBSS RSN or during fast transition. If
1926 * the device doesn't support per-station GTKs, but can be asked not
1927 * to decrypt group addressed frames, then IBSS RSN support is still
1928 * possible but software crypto will be used. Advertise the wiphy flag
1929 * only in that case.
Arik Nemtsovd057e5a2011-01-31 22:29:13 +02001930 *
1931 * @IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS: When operating in AP mode the device
1932 * autonomously manages the PS status of connected stations. When
1933 * this flag is set mac80211 will not trigger PS mode for connected
1934 * stations based on the PM bit of incoming frames.
1935 * Use ieee80211_start_ps()/ieee8021_end_ps() to manually configure
1936 * the PS mode of connected stations.
Arik Nemtsovedf6b782011-08-30 09:32:38 +03001937 *
1938 * @IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMPDU_SETUP_IN_HW: The device handles TX A-MPDU session
1939 * setup strictly in HW. mac80211 should not attempt to do this in
1940 * software.
Eliad Peller885bd8e2012-02-02 17:44:55 +02001941 *
Johannes Berg4b6f1dd2012-04-03 14:35:57 +02001942 * @IEEE80211_HW_WANT_MONITOR_VIF: The driver would like to be informed of
1943 * a virtual monitor interface when monitor interfaces are the only
1944 * active interfaces.
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +02001945 *
Ben Greeare27513f2014-10-22 12:23:03 -07001946 * @IEEE80211_HW_NO_AUTO_VIF: The driver would like for no wlanX to
1947 * be created. It is expected user-space will create vifs as
1948 * desired (and thus have them named as desired).
1949 *
Johannes Bergfa7e1fb2015-01-22 18:44:19 +01001950 * @IEEE80211_HW_SW_CRYPTO_CONTROL: The driver wants to control which of the
1951 * crypto algorithms can be done in software - so don't automatically
1952 * try to fall back to it if hardware crypto fails, but do so only if
1953 * the driver returns 1. This also forces the driver to advertise its
1954 * supported cipher suites.
1955 *
Johannes Berg17c18bf2015-03-21 15:25:43 +01001956 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORT_FAST_XMIT: The driver/hardware supports fast-xmit,
1957 * this currently requires only the ability to calculate the duration
1958 * for frames.
1959 *
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +02001960 * @IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL: The driver wants to control per-interface
1961 * queue mapping in order to use different queues (not just one per AC)
1962 * for different virtual interfaces. See the doc section on HW queue
1963 * control for more details.
Johannes Berg6d711172012-06-19 17:19:44 +02001964 *
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +02001965 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_RC_TABLE: The driver supports using a rate
1966 * selection table provided by the rate control algorithm.
1967 *
Johannes Berg6d711172012-06-19 17:19:44 +02001968 * @IEEE80211_HW_P2P_DEV_ADDR_FOR_INTF: Use the P2P Device address for any
1969 * P2P Interface. This will be honoured even if more than one interface
1970 * is supported.
Johannes Bergef429da2013-02-05 17:48:40 +01001971 *
1972 * @IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY: Use sync timing from beacon frames
1973 * only, to allow getting TBTT of a DTIM beacon.
Arik Nemtsov7578d572013-09-01 17:15:51 +03001974 *
Johannes Berg919be622013-10-14 10:05:16 +02001975 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_HT_CCK_RATES: Hardware supports mixing HT/CCK rates
1976 * and can cope with CCK rates in an aggregation session (e.g. by not
1977 * using aggregation for such frames.)
1978 *
Arik Nemtsov7578d572013-09-01 17:15:51 +03001979 * @IEEE80211_HW_CHANCTX_STA_CSA: Support 802.11h based channel-switch (CSA)
1980 * for a single active channel while using channel contexts. When support
1981 * is not enabled the default action is to disconnect when getting the
1982 * CSA frame.
Luciano Coelho5d52ee82014-02-27 14:33:47 +02001983 *
Ido Yarivc70f59a2014-07-29 15:39:14 +03001984 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_CLONED_SKBS: The driver will never modify the payload
1985 * or tailroom of TX skbs without copying them first.
1986 *
Johannes Bergc526a462015-06-02 20:32:00 +02001987 * @IEEE80211_HW_SINGLE_SCAN_ON_ALL_BANDS: The HW supports scanning on all bands
David Spinadelc56ef672014-02-05 15:21:13 +02001988 * in one command, mac80211 doesn't have to run separate scans per band.
Johannes Berg30686bf2015-06-02 21:39:54 +02001989 *
Arik Nemtsovb98fb442015-06-10 20:42:59 +03001990 * @IEEE80211_HW_TDLS_WIDER_BW: The device/driver supports wider bandwidth
1991 * than then BSS bandwidth for a TDLS link on the base channel.
1992 *
Emmanuel Grumbach99e7ca42015-08-15 22:39:51 +03001993 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_AMSDU_IN_AMPDU: The driver supports receiving A-MSDUs
1994 * within A-MPDU.
1995 *
Helmut Schaa35afa582015-09-09 09:46:32 +02001996 * @IEEE80211_HW_BEACON_TX_STATUS: The device/driver provides TX status
1997 * for sent beacons.
1998 *
Johannes Berg31104892015-10-22 17:35:19 +02001999 * @IEEE80211_HW_NEEDS_UNIQUE_STA_ADDR: Hardware (or driver) requires that each
2000 * station has a unique address, i.e. each station entry can be identified
2001 * by just its MAC address; this prevents, for example, the same station
2002 * from connecting to two virtual AP interfaces at the same time.
2003 *
Sara Sharon412a6d82015-12-08 19:09:05 +02002004 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_REORDERING_BUFFER: Hardware (or driver) manages the
2005 * reordering buffer internally, guaranteeing mac80211 receives frames in
2006 * order and does not need to manage its own reorder buffer or BA session
2007 * timeout.
2008 *
Johannes Bergc9c59622016-03-31 20:02:11 +03002009 * @IEEE80211_HW_USES_RSS: The device uses RSS and thus requires parallel RX,
2010 * which implies using per-CPU station statistics.
2011 *
Felix Fietkau6e0456b2016-03-03 22:59:00 +01002012 * @IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMSDU: Hardware (or driver) supports software aggregated
2013 * A-MSDU frames. Requires software tx queueing and fast-xmit support.
2014 * When not using minstrel/minstrel_ht rate control, the driver must
2015 * limit the maximum A-MSDU size based on the current tx rate by setting
2016 * max_rc_amsdu_len in struct ieee80211_sta.
2017 *
2018 * @IEEE80211_HW_TX_FRAG_LIST: Hardware (or driver) supports sending frag_list
2019 * skbs, needed for zero-copy software A-MSDU.
2020 *
Rajkumar Manoharane8a24cd2016-09-14 12:48:32 +05302021 * @IEEE80211_HW_REPORTS_LOW_ACK: The driver (or firmware) reports low ack event
2022 * by ieee80211_report_low_ack() based on its own algorithm. For such
2023 * drivers, mac80211 packet loss mechanism will not be triggered and driver
2024 * is completely depending on firmware event for station kickout.
2025 *
Johannes Berg30686bf2015-06-02 21:39:54 +02002026 * @NUM_IEEE80211_HW_FLAGS: number of hardware flags, used for sizing arrays
Johannes Berg1bc08262007-09-18 17:29:15 -04002027 */
2028enum ieee80211_hw_flags {
Johannes Berg30686bf2015-06-02 21:39:54 +02002029 IEEE80211_HW_HAS_RATE_CONTROL,
2030 IEEE80211_HW_RX_INCLUDES_FCS,
2031 IEEE80211_HW_HOST_BROADCAST_PS_BUFFERING,
2032 IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_UNSPEC,
2033 IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_DBM,
2034 IEEE80211_HW_NEED_DTIM_BEFORE_ASSOC,
2035 IEEE80211_HW_SPECTRUM_MGMT,
2036 IEEE80211_HW_AMPDU_AGGREGATION,
2037 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS,
2038 IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK,
2039 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_DYNAMIC_PS,
2040 IEEE80211_HW_MFP_CAPABLE,
2041 IEEE80211_HW_WANT_MONITOR_VIF,
2042 IEEE80211_HW_NO_AUTO_VIF,
2043 IEEE80211_HW_SW_CRYPTO_CONTROL,
2044 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORT_FAST_XMIT,
2045 IEEE80211_HW_REPORTS_TX_ACK_STATUS,
2046 IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR,
2047 IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL,
2048 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PER_STA_GTK,
2049 IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS,
2050 IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMPDU_SETUP_IN_HW,
2051 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_RC_TABLE,
2052 IEEE80211_HW_P2P_DEV_ADDR_FOR_INTF,
2053 IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY,
2054 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_HT_CCK_RATES,
2055 IEEE80211_HW_CHANCTX_STA_CSA,
2056 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_CLONED_SKBS,
2057 IEEE80211_HW_SINGLE_SCAN_ON_ALL_BANDS,
Arik Nemtsovb98fb442015-06-10 20:42:59 +03002058 IEEE80211_HW_TDLS_WIDER_BW,
Emmanuel Grumbach99e7ca42015-08-15 22:39:51 +03002059 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_AMSDU_IN_AMPDU,
Helmut Schaa35afa582015-09-09 09:46:32 +02002060 IEEE80211_HW_BEACON_TX_STATUS,
Johannes Berg31104892015-10-22 17:35:19 +02002061 IEEE80211_HW_NEEDS_UNIQUE_STA_ADDR,
Sara Sharon412a6d82015-12-08 19:09:05 +02002062 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_REORDERING_BUFFER,
Johannes Bergc9c59622016-03-31 20:02:11 +03002063 IEEE80211_HW_USES_RSS,
Felix Fietkau6e0456b2016-03-03 22:59:00 +01002064 IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMSDU,
2065 IEEE80211_HW_TX_FRAG_LIST,
Rajkumar Manoharane8a24cd2016-09-14 12:48:32 +05302066 IEEE80211_HW_REPORTS_LOW_ACK,
Johannes Berg30686bf2015-06-02 21:39:54 +02002067
2068 /* keep last, obviously */
2069 NUM_IEEE80211_HW_FLAGS
Johannes Berg1bc08262007-09-18 17:29:15 -04002070};
2071
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04002072/**
2073 * struct ieee80211_hw - hardware information and state
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002074 *
2075 * This structure contains the configuration and hardware
2076 * information for an 802.11 PHY.
2077 *
2078 * @wiphy: This points to the &struct wiphy allocated for this
2079 * 802.11 PHY. You must fill in the @perm_addr and @dev
2080 * members of this structure using SET_IEEE80211_DEV()
Johannes Berg8318d782008-01-24 19:38:38 +01002081 * and SET_IEEE80211_PERM_ADDR(). Additionally, all supported
2082 * bands (with channels, bitrates) are registered here.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002083 *
2084 * @conf: &struct ieee80211_conf, device configuration, don't use.
2085 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002086 * @priv: pointer to private area that was allocated for driver use
2087 * along with this structure.
2088 *
2089 * @flags: hardware flags, see &enum ieee80211_hw_flags.
2090 *
2091 * @extra_tx_headroom: headroom to reserve in each transmit skb
2092 * for use by the driver (e.g. for transmit headers.)
2093 *
Felix Fietkau70dabeb2013-12-14 13:54:53 +01002094 * @extra_beacon_tailroom: tailroom to reserve in each beacon tx skb.
2095 * Can be used by drivers to add extra IEs.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002096 *
Bruno Randolf566bfe52008-05-08 19:15:40 +02002097 * @max_signal: Maximum value for signal (rssi) in RX information, used
Johannes Bergad24b0d2013-07-05 11:53:28 +02002098 * only when @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_UNSPEC or @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_DB
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002099 *
Tomas Winklerea95bba2008-07-18 13:53:00 +08002100 * @max_listen_interval: max listen interval in units of beacon interval
Johannes Bergad24b0d2013-07-05 11:53:28 +02002101 * that HW supports
Tomas Winklerea95bba2008-07-18 13:53:00 +08002102 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002103 * @queues: number of available hardware transmit queues for
Johannes Berge100bb62008-04-30 18:51:21 +02002104 * data packets. WMM/QoS requires at least four, these
2105 * queues need to have configurable access parameters.
2106 *
Johannes Berg830f9032007-10-28 14:51:05 +01002107 * @rate_control_algorithm: rate control algorithm for this hardware.
2108 * If unset (NULL), the default algorithm will be used. Must be
2109 * set before calling ieee80211_register_hw().
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01002110 *
2111 * @vif_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area
2112 * within &struct ieee80211_vif.
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02002113 * @sta_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area
2114 * within &struct ieee80211_sta.
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +02002115 * @chanctx_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area
2116 * within &struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf.
Felix Fietkauba8c3d62015-03-27 21:30:37 +01002117 * @txq_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area
2118 * within @struct ieee80211_txq.
Felix Fietkau870abdf2008-10-05 18:04:24 +02002119 *
Helmut Schaa78be49e2010-10-02 11:31:55 +02002120 * @max_rates: maximum number of alternate rate retry stages the hw
2121 * can handle.
2122 * @max_report_rates: maximum number of alternate rate retry stages
2123 * the hw can report back.
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02002124 * @max_rate_tries: maximum number of tries for each stage
John W. Linville4e6cbfd2010-07-29 16:14:13 -04002125 *
Luciano Coelhodf6ba5d2011-01-12 15:26:30 +02002126 * @max_rx_aggregation_subframes: maximum buffer size (number of
2127 * sub-frames) to be used for A-MPDU block ack receiver
2128 * aggregation.
2129 * This is only relevant if the device has restrictions on the
2130 * number of subframes, if it relies on mac80211 to do reordering
2131 * it shouldn't be set.
Johannes Berg5dd36bc2011-01-18 13:52:23 +01002132 *
2133 * @max_tx_aggregation_subframes: maximum number of subframes in an
Gregory Greenmanac062192015-11-17 10:24:38 +02002134 * aggregate an HT driver will transmit. Though ADDBA will advertise
2135 * a constant value of 64 as some older APs can crash if the window
2136 * size is smaller (an example is LinkSys WRT120N with FW v1.0.07
2137 * build 002 Jun 18 2012).
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +02002138 *
Felix Fietkau6e0456b2016-03-03 22:59:00 +01002139 * @max_tx_fragments: maximum number of tx buffers per (A)-MSDU, sum
2140 * of 1 + skb_shinfo(skb)->nr_frags for each skb in the frag_list.
2141 *
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +02002142 * @offchannel_tx_hw_queue: HW queue ID to use for offchannel TX
2143 * (if %IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL is set)
Johannes Bergac55d2f2012-05-10 09:09:10 +02002144 *
2145 * @radiotap_mcs_details: lists which MCS information can the HW
2146 * reports, by default it is set to _MCS, _GI and _BW but doesn't
2147 * include _FMT. Use %IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_MCS_HAVE_* values, only
2148 * adding _BW is supported today.
Arik Nemtsov72d78722012-05-10 16:18:26 +03002149 *
Johannes Berg51648922012-11-22 23:00:18 +01002150 * @radiotap_vht_details: lists which VHT MCS information the HW reports,
2151 * the default is _GI | _BANDWIDTH.
2152 * Use the %IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_VHT_KNOWN_* values.
2153 *
Johannes Berg99ee7ca2016-08-29 23:25:17 +03002154 * @radiotap_timestamp: Information for the radiotap timestamp field; if the
2155 * 'units_pos' member is set to a non-negative value it must be set to
2156 * a combination of a IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_TIMESTAMP_UNIT_* and a
2157 * IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_TIMESTAMP_SPOS_* value, and then the timestamp
2158 * field will be added and populated from the &struct ieee80211_rx_status
2159 * device_timestamp. If the 'accuracy' member is non-negative, it's put
2160 * into the accuracy radiotap field and the accuracy known flag is set.
2161 *
Arik Nemtsov72d78722012-05-10 16:18:26 +03002162 * @netdev_features: netdev features to be set in each netdev created
Johannes Berg680a0da2015-04-13 16:58:25 +02002163 * from this HW. Note that not all features are usable with mac80211,
2164 * other features will be rejected during HW registration.
Alexander Bondar219c3862013-01-22 16:52:23 +02002165 *
2166 * @uapsd_queues: This bitmap is included in (re)association frame to indicate
2167 * for each access category if it is uAPSD trigger-enabled and delivery-
2168 * enabled. Use IEEE80211_WMM_IE_STA_QOSINFO_AC_* to set this bitmap.
2169 * Each bit corresponds to different AC. Value '1' in specific bit means
2170 * that corresponding AC is both trigger- and delivery-enabled. '0' means
2171 * neither enabled.
2172 *
2173 * @uapsd_max_sp_len: maximum number of total buffered frames the WMM AP may
2174 * deliver to a WMM STA during any Service Period triggered by the WMM STA.
2175 * Use IEEE80211_WMM_IE_STA_QOSINFO_SP_* for correct values.
Max Stepanov2475b1cc2013-03-24 14:23:27 +02002176 *
2177 * @n_cipher_schemes: a size of an array of cipher schemes definitions.
2178 * @cipher_schemes: a pointer to an array of cipher scheme definitions
2179 * supported by HW.
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04002180 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07002181struct ieee80211_hw {
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07002182 struct ieee80211_conf conf;
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002183 struct wiphy *wiphy;
Johannes Berg830f9032007-10-28 14:51:05 +01002184 const char *rate_control_algorithm;
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07002185 void *priv;
Johannes Berg30686bf2015-06-02 21:39:54 +02002186 unsigned long flags[BITS_TO_LONGS(NUM_IEEE80211_HW_FLAGS)];
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07002187 unsigned int extra_tx_headroom;
Felix Fietkau70dabeb2013-12-14 13:54:53 +01002188 unsigned int extra_beacon_tailroom;
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01002189 int vif_data_size;
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02002190 int sta_data_size;
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +02002191 int chanctx_data_size;
Felix Fietkauba8c3d62015-03-27 21:30:37 +01002192 int txq_data_size;
Tomas Winklerea95bba2008-07-18 13:53:00 +08002193 u16 queues;
Tomas Winklerea95bba2008-07-18 13:53:00 +08002194 u16 max_listen_interval;
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07002195 s8 max_signal;
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02002196 u8 max_rates;
Helmut Schaa78be49e2010-10-02 11:31:55 +02002197 u8 max_report_rates;
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02002198 u8 max_rate_tries;
Luciano Coelhodf6ba5d2011-01-12 15:26:30 +02002199 u8 max_rx_aggregation_subframes;
Johannes Berg5dd36bc2011-01-18 13:52:23 +01002200 u8 max_tx_aggregation_subframes;
Felix Fietkau6e0456b2016-03-03 22:59:00 +01002201 u8 max_tx_fragments;
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +02002202 u8 offchannel_tx_hw_queue;
Johannes Bergac55d2f2012-05-10 09:09:10 +02002203 u8 radiotap_mcs_details;
Johannes Berg51648922012-11-22 23:00:18 +01002204 u16 radiotap_vht_details;
Johannes Berg99ee7ca2016-08-29 23:25:17 +03002205 struct {
2206 int units_pos;
2207 s16 accuracy;
2208 } radiotap_timestamp;
Arik Nemtsov72d78722012-05-10 16:18:26 +03002209 netdev_features_t netdev_features;
Alexander Bondar219c3862013-01-22 16:52:23 +02002210 u8 uapsd_queues;
2211 u8 uapsd_max_sp_len;
Max Stepanov2475b1cc2013-03-24 14:23:27 +02002212 u8 n_cipher_schemes;
2213 const struct ieee80211_cipher_scheme *cipher_schemes;
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07002214};
2215
Johannes Berg30686bf2015-06-02 21:39:54 +02002216static inline bool _ieee80211_hw_check(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2217 enum ieee80211_hw_flags flg)
2218{
2219 return test_bit(flg, hw->flags);
2220}
2221#define ieee80211_hw_check(hw, flg) _ieee80211_hw_check(hw, IEEE80211_HW_##flg)
2222
2223static inline void _ieee80211_hw_set(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2224 enum ieee80211_hw_flags flg)
2225{
2226 return __set_bit(flg, hw->flags);
2227}
2228#define ieee80211_hw_set(hw, flg) _ieee80211_hw_set(hw, IEEE80211_HW_##flg)
2229
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002230/**
David Spinadelc56ef672014-02-05 15:21:13 +02002231 * struct ieee80211_scan_request - hw scan request
2232 *
2233 * @ies: pointers different parts of IEs (in req.ie)
2234 * @req: cfg80211 request.
2235 */
2236struct ieee80211_scan_request {
2237 struct ieee80211_scan_ies ies;
2238
2239 /* Keep last */
2240 struct cfg80211_scan_request req;
2241};
2242
2243/**
Arik Nemtsov8a4d32f2014-11-09 18:50:20 +02002244 * struct ieee80211_tdls_ch_sw_params - TDLS channel switch parameters
2245 *
2246 * @sta: peer this TDLS channel-switch request/response came from
2247 * @chandef: channel referenced in a TDLS channel-switch request
2248 * @action_code: see &enum ieee80211_tdls_actioncode
2249 * @status: channel-switch response status
2250 * @timestamp: time at which the frame was received
2251 * @switch_time: switch-timing parameter received in the frame
2252 * @switch_timeout: switch-timing parameter received in the frame
2253 * @tmpl_skb: TDLS switch-channel response template
2254 * @ch_sw_tm_ie: offset of the channel-switch timing IE inside @tmpl_skb
2255 */
2256struct ieee80211_tdls_ch_sw_params {
2257 struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
2258 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef;
2259 u8 action_code;
2260 u32 status;
2261 u32 timestamp;
2262 u16 switch_time;
2263 u16 switch_timeout;
2264 struct sk_buff *tmpl_skb;
2265 u32 ch_sw_tm_ie;
2266};
2267
2268/**
Luis R. Rodriguez9a953712009-01-22 15:05:53 -08002269 * wiphy_to_ieee80211_hw - return a mac80211 driver hw struct from a wiphy
2270 *
2271 * @wiphy: the &struct wiphy which we want to query
2272 *
2273 * mac80211 drivers can use this to get to their respective
2274 * &struct ieee80211_hw. Drivers wishing to get to their own private
2275 * structure can then access it via hw->priv. Note that mac802111 drivers should
2276 * not use wiphy_priv() to try to get their private driver structure as this
2277 * is already used internally by mac80211.
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01002278 *
2279 * Return: The mac80211 driver hw struct of @wiphy.
Luis R. Rodriguez9a953712009-01-22 15:05:53 -08002280 */
2281struct ieee80211_hw *wiphy_to_ieee80211_hw(struct wiphy *wiphy);
2282
2283/**
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002284 * SET_IEEE80211_DEV - set device for 802.11 hardware
2285 *
2286 * @hw: the &struct ieee80211_hw to set the device for
2287 * @dev: the &struct device of this 802.11 device
2288 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07002289static inline void SET_IEEE80211_DEV(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct device *dev)
2290{
2291 set_wiphy_dev(hw->wiphy, dev);
2292}
2293
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002294/**
Bob Copelande37d4df2008-10-20 21:20:27 -04002295 * SET_IEEE80211_PERM_ADDR - set the permanent MAC address for 802.11 hardware
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002296 *
2297 * @hw: the &struct ieee80211_hw to set the MAC address for
2298 * @addr: the address to set
2299 */
Bjorn Andersson538dc902015-12-24 00:33:26 -08002300static inline void SET_IEEE80211_PERM_ADDR(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, const u8 *addr)
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07002301{
2302 memcpy(hw->wiphy->perm_addr, addr, ETH_ALEN);
2303}
2304
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02002305static inline struct ieee80211_rate *
2306ieee80211_get_tx_rate(const struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02002307 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *c)
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02002308{
Larry Fingeraa331df2012-04-06 16:35:53 -05002309 if (WARN_ON_ONCE(c->control.rates[0].idx < 0))
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02002310 return NULL;
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02002311 return &hw->wiphy->bands[c->band]->bitrates[c->control.rates[0].idx];
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02002312}
2313
2314static inline struct ieee80211_rate *
2315ieee80211_get_rts_cts_rate(const struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02002316 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *c)
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02002317{
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02002318 if (c->control.rts_cts_rate_idx < 0)
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02002319 return NULL;
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02002320 return &hw->wiphy->bands[c->band]->bitrates[c->control.rts_cts_rate_idx];
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02002321}
2322
2323static inline struct ieee80211_rate *
2324ieee80211_get_alt_retry_rate(const struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Felix Fietkau870abdf2008-10-05 18:04:24 +02002325 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *c, int idx)
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02002326{
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02002327 if (c->control.rates[idx + 1].idx < 0)
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02002328 return NULL;
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02002329 return &hw->wiphy->bands[c->band]->bitrates[c->control.rates[idx + 1].idx];
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02002330}
2331
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002332/**
Johannes Berg6096de72011-11-04 11:18:10 +01002333 * ieee80211_free_txskb - free TX skb
2334 * @hw: the hardware
2335 * @skb: the skb
2336 *
2337 * Free a transmit skb. Use this funtion when some failure
2338 * to transmit happened and thus status cannot be reported.
2339 */
2340void ieee80211_free_txskb(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb);
2341
2342/**
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002343 * DOC: Hardware crypto acceleration
Johannes Berg4150c572007-09-17 01:29:23 -04002344 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002345 * mac80211 is capable of taking advantage of many hardware
2346 * acceleration designs for encryption and decryption operations.
2347 *
2348 * The set_key() callback in the &struct ieee80211_ops for a given
2349 * device is called to enable hardware acceleration of encryption and
Johannes Bergdc822b52008-12-29 12:55:09 +01002350 * decryption. The callback takes a @sta parameter that will be NULL
2351 * for default keys or keys used for transmission only, or point to
2352 * the station information for the peer for individual keys.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002353 * Multiple transmission keys with the same key index may be used when
2354 * VLANs are configured for an access point.
2355 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002356 * When transmitting, the TX control data will use the @hw_key_idx
2357 * selected by the driver by modifying the &struct ieee80211_key_conf
2358 * pointed to by the @key parameter to the set_key() function.
2359 *
2360 * The set_key() call for the %SET_KEY command should return 0 if
2361 * the key is now in use, -%EOPNOTSUPP or -%ENOSPC if it couldn't be
2362 * added; if you return 0 then hw_key_idx must be assigned to the
2363 * hardware key index, you are free to use the full u8 range.
2364 *
Johannes Bergfa7e1fb2015-01-22 18:44:19 +01002365 * Note that in the case that the @IEEE80211_HW_SW_CRYPTO_CONTROL flag is
2366 * set, mac80211 will not automatically fall back to software crypto if
2367 * enabling hardware crypto failed. The set_key() call may also return the
2368 * value 1 to permit this specific key/algorithm to be done in software.
2369 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002370 * When the cmd is %DISABLE_KEY then it must succeed.
2371 *
2372 * Note that it is permissible to not decrypt a frame even if a key
2373 * for it has been uploaded to hardware, the stack will not make any
2374 * decision based on whether a key has been uploaded or not but rather
2375 * based on the receive flags.
2376 *
2377 * The &struct ieee80211_key_conf structure pointed to by the @key
2378 * parameter is guaranteed to be valid until another call to set_key()
2379 * removes it, but it can only be used as a cookie to differentiate
2380 * keys.
Emmanuel Grumbach9ae4fda2008-03-20 15:06:42 +02002381 *
2382 * In TKIP some HW need to be provided a phase 1 key, for RX decryption
2383 * acceleration (i.e. iwlwifi). Those drivers should provide update_tkip_key
2384 * handler.
2385 * The update_tkip_key() call updates the driver with the new phase 1 key.
Lucas De Marchi25985ed2011-03-30 22:57:33 -03002386 * This happens every time the iv16 wraps around (every 65536 packets). The
Emmanuel Grumbach9ae4fda2008-03-20 15:06:42 +02002387 * set_key() call will happen only once for each key (unless the AP did
2388 * rekeying), it will not include a valid phase 1 key. The valid phase 1 key is
Bob Copelande37d4df2008-10-20 21:20:27 -04002389 * provided by update_tkip_key only. The trigger that makes mac80211 call this
Emmanuel Grumbach9ae4fda2008-03-20 15:06:42 +02002390 * handler is software decryption with wrap around of iv16.
Yoni Divinskyde5fad82012-05-30 11:36:39 +03002391 *
2392 * The set_default_unicast_key() call updates the default WEP key index
2393 * configured to the hardware for WEP encryption type. This is required
2394 * for devices that support offload of data packets (e.g. ARP responses).
Johannes Berg4150c572007-09-17 01:29:23 -04002395 */
Johannes Berg4150c572007-09-17 01:29:23 -04002396
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002397/**
Johannes Berg4be8c382009-01-07 18:28:20 +01002398 * DOC: Powersave support
2399 *
2400 * mac80211 has support for various powersave implementations.
2401 *
Kalle Valoc99445b2010-01-14 13:09:21 +02002402 * First, it can support hardware that handles all powersaving by itself,
2403 * such hardware should simply set the %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS hardware
2404 * flag. In that case, it will be told about the desired powersave mode
2405 * with the %IEEE80211_CONF_PS flag depending on the association status.
2406 * The hardware must take care of sending nullfunc frames when necessary,
2407 * i.e. when entering and leaving powersave mode. The hardware is required
2408 * to look at the AID in beacons and signal to the AP that it woke up when
2409 * it finds traffic directed to it.
Johannes Berg4be8c382009-01-07 18:28:20 +01002410 *
Kalle Valoc99445b2010-01-14 13:09:21 +02002411 * %IEEE80211_CONF_PS flag enabled means that the powersave mode defined in
2412 * IEEE 802.11-2007 section 11.2 is enabled. This is not to be confused
2413 * with hardware wakeup and sleep states. Driver is responsible for waking
Bob Copeland2738bd62010-08-21 16:39:01 -04002414 * up the hardware before issuing commands to the hardware and putting it
2415 * back to sleep at appropriate times.
Kalle Valoc99445b2010-01-14 13:09:21 +02002416 *
2417 * When PS is enabled, hardware needs to wakeup for beacons and receive the
2418 * buffered multicast/broadcast frames after the beacon. Also it must be
2419 * possible to send frames and receive the acknowledment frame.
Johannes Berg4be8c382009-01-07 18:28:20 +01002420 *
2421 * Other hardware designs cannot send nullfunc frames by themselves and also
2422 * need software support for parsing the TIM bitmap. This is also supported
2423 * by mac80211 by combining the %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS and
2424 * %IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK flags. The hardware is of course still
Johannes Berg955394c2009-04-16 17:04:25 +02002425 * required to pass up beacons. The hardware is still required to handle
2426 * waking up for multicast traffic; if it cannot the driver must handle that
Kalle Valoc99445b2010-01-14 13:09:21 +02002427 * as best as it can, mac80211 is too slow to do that.
Johannes Berg4be8c382009-01-07 18:28:20 +01002428 *
Kalle Valoc99445b2010-01-14 13:09:21 +02002429 * Dynamic powersave is an extension to normal powersave in which the
2430 * hardware stays awake for a user-specified period of time after sending a
2431 * frame so that reply frames need not be buffered and therefore delayed to
2432 * the next wakeup. It's compromise of getting good enough latency when
2433 * there's data traffic and still saving significantly power in idle
2434 * periods.
2435 *
Bob Copeland2738bd62010-08-21 16:39:01 -04002436 * Dynamic powersave is simply supported by mac80211 enabling and disabling
Kalle Valoc99445b2010-01-14 13:09:21 +02002437 * PS based on traffic. Driver needs to only set %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS
2438 * flag and mac80211 will handle everything automatically. Additionally,
2439 * hardware having support for the dynamic PS feature may set the
2440 * %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_DYNAMIC_PS flag to indicate that it can support
2441 * dynamic PS mode itself. The driver needs to look at the
2442 * @dynamic_ps_timeout hardware configuration value and use it that value
2443 * whenever %IEEE80211_CONF_PS is set. In this case mac80211 will disable
2444 * dynamic PS feature in stack and will just keep %IEEE80211_CONF_PS
2445 * enabled whenever user has enabled powersave.
2446 *
2447 * Driver informs U-APSD client support by enabling
Johannes Berg848955c2014-11-11 12:48:42 +01002448 * %IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_UAPSD flag. The mode is configured through the
Masanari Iidae2278672014-02-18 22:54:36 +09002449 * uapsd parameter in conf_tx() operation. Hardware needs to send the QoS
Kalle Valoc99445b2010-01-14 13:09:21 +02002450 * Nullfunc frames and stay awake until the service period has ended. To
2451 * utilize U-APSD, dynamic powersave is disabled for voip AC and all frames
2452 * from that AC are transmitted with powersave enabled.
2453 *
2454 * Note: U-APSD client mode is not yet supported with
2455 * %IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK.
Johannes Berg4be8c382009-01-07 18:28:20 +01002456 */
2457
2458/**
Kalle Valo04de8382009-03-22 21:57:35 +02002459 * DOC: Beacon filter support
2460 *
2461 * Some hardware have beacon filter support to reduce host cpu wakeups
Justin P. Mattock42b2aa82011-11-28 20:31:00 -08002462 * which will reduce system power consumption. It usually works so that
Kalle Valo04de8382009-03-22 21:57:35 +02002463 * the firmware creates a checksum of the beacon but omits all constantly
2464 * changing elements (TSF, TIM etc). Whenever the checksum changes the
2465 * beacon is forwarded to the host, otherwise it will be just dropped. That
2466 * way the host will only receive beacons where some relevant information
2467 * (for example ERP protection or WMM settings) have changed.
2468 *
Johannes Bergc1288b12012-01-19 09:29:57 +01002469 * Beacon filter support is advertised with the %IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER
2470 * interface capability. The driver needs to enable beacon filter support
Johannes Berg955394c2009-04-16 17:04:25 +02002471 * whenever power save is enabled, that is %IEEE80211_CONF_PS is set. When
2472 * power save is enabled, the stack will not check for beacon loss and the
2473 * driver needs to notify about loss of beacons with ieee80211_beacon_loss().
2474 *
2475 * The time (or number of beacons missed) until the firmware notifies the
2476 * driver of a beacon loss event (which in turn causes the driver to call
2477 * ieee80211_beacon_loss()) should be configurable and will be controlled
2478 * by mac80211 and the roaming algorithm in the future.
2479 *
2480 * Since there may be constantly changing information elements that nothing
2481 * in the software stack cares about, we will, in the future, have mac80211
2482 * tell the driver which information elements are interesting in the sense
2483 * that we want to see changes in them. This will include
2484 * - a list of information element IDs
2485 * - a list of OUIs for the vendor information element
2486 *
2487 * Ideally, the hardware would filter out any beacons without changes in the
2488 * requested elements, but if it cannot support that it may, at the expense
2489 * of some efficiency, filter out only a subset. For example, if the device
2490 * doesn't support checking for OUIs it should pass up all changes in all
2491 * vendor information elements.
2492 *
2493 * Note that change, for the sake of simplification, also includes information
2494 * elements appearing or disappearing from the beacon.
2495 *
2496 * Some hardware supports an "ignore list" instead, just make sure nothing
2497 * that was requested is on the ignore list, and include commonly changing
2498 * information element IDs in the ignore list, for example 11 (BSS load) and
2499 * the various vendor-assigned IEs with unknown contents (128, 129, 133-136,
2500 * 149, 150, 155, 156, 173, 176, 178, 179, 219); for forward compatibility
2501 * it could also include some currently unused IDs.
2502 *
2503 *
2504 * In addition to these capabilities, hardware should support notifying the
2505 * host of changes in the beacon RSSI. This is relevant to implement roaming
2506 * when no traffic is flowing (when traffic is flowing we see the RSSI of
2507 * the received data packets). This can consist in notifying the host when
2508 * the RSSI changes significantly or when it drops below or rises above
2509 * configurable thresholds. In the future these thresholds will also be
2510 * configured by mac80211 (which gets them from userspace) to implement
2511 * them as the roaming algorithm requires.
2512 *
2513 * If the hardware cannot implement this, the driver should ask it to
2514 * periodically pass beacon frames to the host so that software can do the
2515 * signal strength threshold checking.
Kalle Valo04de8382009-03-22 21:57:35 +02002516 */
2517
2518/**
Johannes Berg0f782312009-12-01 13:37:02 +01002519 * DOC: Spatial multiplexing power save
2520 *
2521 * SMPS (Spatial multiplexing power save) is a mechanism to conserve
2522 * power in an 802.11n implementation. For details on the mechanism
2523 * and rationale, please refer to 802.11 (as amended by 802.11n-2009)
2524 * "11.2.3 SM power save".
2525 *
2526 * The mac80211 implementation is capable of sending action frames
2527 * to update the AP about the station's SMPS mode, and will instruct
2528 * the driver to enter the specific mode. It will also announce the
2529 * requested SMPS mode during the association handshake. Hardware
2530 * support for this feature is required, and can be indicated by
2531 * hardware flags.
2532 *
2533 * The default mode will be "automatic", which nl80211/cfg80211
2534 * defines to be dynamic SMPS in (regular) powersave, and SMPS
2535 * turned off otherwise.
2536 *
2537 * To support this feature, the driver must set the appropriate
2538 * hardware support flags, and handle the SMPS flag to the config()
2539 * operation. It will then with this mechanism be instructed to
2540 * enter the requested SMPS mode while associated to an HT AP.
2541 */
2542
2543/**
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002544 * DOC: Frame filtering
2545 *
2546 * mac80211 requires to see many management frames for proper
2547 * operation, and users may want to see many more frames when
2548 * in monitor mode. However, for best CPU usage and power consumption,
2549 * having as few frames as possible percolate through the stack is
2550 * desirable. Hence, the hardware should filter as much as possible.
2551 *
2552 * To achieve this, mac80211 uses filter flags (see below) to tell
2553 * the driver's configure_filter() function which frames should be
2554 * passed to mac80211 and which should be filtered out.
2555 *
Johannes Berg3ac64be2009-08-17 16:16:53 +02002556 * Before configure_filter() is invoked, the prepare_multicast()
2557 * callback is invoked with the parameters @mc_count and @mc_list
2558 * for the combined multicast address list of all virtual interfaces.
2559 * It's use is optional, and it returns a u64 that is passed to
2560 * configure_filter(). Additionally, configure_filter() has the
2561 * arguments @changed_flags telling which flags were changed and
2562 * @total_flags with the new flag states.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002563 *
2564 * If your device has no multicast address filters your driver will
2565 * need to check both the %FIF_ALLMULTI flag and the @mc_count
2566 * parameter to see whether multicast frames should be accepted
2567 * or dropped.
2568 *
Michael Bueschd0f5afb2008-02-12 20:12:45 +01002569 * All unsupported flags in @total_flags must be cleared.
2570 * Hardware does not support a flag if it is incapable of _passing_
2571 * the frame to the stack. Otherwise the driver must ignore
2572 * the flag, but not clear it.
2573 * You must _only_ clear the flag (announce no support for the
2574 * flag to mac80211) if you are not able to pass the packet type
2575 * to the stack (so the hardware always filters it).
2576 * So for example, you should clear @FIF_CONTROL, if your hardware
2577 * always filters control frames. If your hardware always passes
2578 * control frames to the kernel and is incapable of filtering them,
2579 * you do _not_ clear the @FIF_CONTROL flag.
2580 * This rule applies to all other FIF flags as well.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002581 */
2582
2583/**
Johannes Berg4b801bc2011-09-29 16:04:40 +02002584 * DOC: AP support for powersaving clients
2585 *
2586 * In order to implement AP and P2P GO modes, mac80211 has support for
2587 * client powersaving, both "legacy" PS (PS-Poll/null data) and uAPSD.
2588 * There currently is no support for sAPSD.
2589 *
2590 * There is one assumption that mac80211 makes, namely that a client
2591 * will not poll with PS-Poll and trigger with uAPSD at the same time.
2592 * Both are supported, and both can be used by the same client, but
2593 * they can't be used concurrently by the same client. This simplifies
2594 * the driver code.
2595 *
2596 * The first thing to keep in mind is that there is a flag for complete
2597 * driver implementation: %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS. If this flag is set,
2598 * mac80211 expects the driver to handle most of the state machine for
2599 * powersaving clients and will ignore the PM bit in incoming frames.
2600 * Drivers then use ieee80211_sta_ps_transition() to inform mac80211 of
2601 * stations' powersave transitions. In this mode, mac80211 also doesn't
2602 * handle PS-Poll/uAPSD.
2603 *
2604 * In the mode without %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS, mac80211 will check the
2605 * PM bit in incoming frames for client powersave transitions. When a
2606 * station goes to sleep, we will stop transmitting to it. There is,
2607 * however, a race condition: a station might go to sleep while there is
2608 * data buffered on hardware queues. If the device has support for this
2609 * it will reject frames, and the driver should give the frames back to
2610 * mac80211 with the %IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED flag set which will
2611 * cause mac80211 to retry the frame when the station wakes up. The
2612 * driver is also notified of powersave transitions by calling its
2613 * @sta_notify callback.
2614 *
2615 * When the station is asleep, it has three choices: it can wake up,
2616 * it can PS-Poll, or it can possibly start a uAPSD service period.
2617 * Waking up is implemented by simply transmitting all buffered (and
2618 * filtered) frames to the station. This is the easiest case. When
2619 * the station sends a PS-Poll or a uAPSD trigger frame, mac80211
2620 * will inform the driver of this with the @allow_buffered_frames
2621 * callback; this callback is optional. mac80211 will then transmit
Johannes Berg02f2f1a2012-02-27 12:18:30 +01002622 * the frames as usual and set the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER
Johannes Berg4b801bc2011-09-29 16:04:40 +02002623 * on each frame. The last frame in the service period (or the only
2624 * response to a PS-Poll) also has %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP set to
2625 * indicate that it ends the service period; as this frame must have
2626 * TX status report it also sets %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_REQ_TX_STATUS.
2627 * When TX status is reported for this frame, the service period is
2628 * marked has having ended and a new one can be started by the peer.
2629 *
Johannes Berg02f2f1a2012-02-27 12:18:30 +01002630 * Additionally, non-bufferable MMPDUs can also be transmitted by
2631 * mac80211 with the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER set in them.
2632 *
Johannes Berg4b801bc2011-09-29 16:04:40 +02002633 * Another race condition can happen on some devices like iwlwifi
2634 * when there are frames queued for the station and it wakes up
2635 * or polls; the frames that are already queued could end up being
2636 * transmitted first instead, causing reordering and/or wrong
2637 * processing of the EOSP. The cause is that allowing frames to be
2638 * transmitted to a certain station is out-of-band communication to
2639 * the device. To allow this problem to be solved, the driver can
2640 * call ieee80211_sta_block_awake() if frames are buffered when it
2641 * is notified that the station went to sleep. When all these frames
2642 * have been filtered (see above), it must call the function again
2643 * to indicate that the station is no longer blocked.
2644 *
2645 * If the driver buffers frames in the driver for aggregation in any
2646 * way, it must use the ieee80211_sta_set_buffered() call when it is
2647 * notified of the station going to sleep to inform mac80211 of any
2648 * TIDs that have frames buffered. Note that when a station wakes up
2649 * this information is reset (hence the requirement to call it when
2650 * informed of the station going to sleep). Then, when a service
2651 * period starts for any reason, @release_buffered_frames is called
2652 * with the number of frames to be released and which TIDs they are
2653 * to come from. In this case, the driver is responsible for setting
2654 * the EOSP (for uAPSD) and MORE_DATA bits in the released frames,
Masanari Iidae2278672014-02-18 22:54:36 +09002655 * to help the @more_data parameter is passed to tell the driver if
Johannes Berg4b801bc2011-09-29 16:04:40 +02002656 * there is more data on other TIDs -- the TIDs to release frames
2657 * from are ignored since mac80211 doesn't know how many frames the
2658 * buffers for those TIDs contain.
2659 *
2660 * If the driver also implement GO mode, where absence periods may
2661 * shorten service periods (or abort PS-Poll responses), it must
2662 * filter those response frames except in the case of frames that
2663 * are buffered in the driver -- those must remain buffered to avoid
2664 * reordering. Because it is possible that no frames are released
Johannes Berge9437892013-02-15 21:38:08 +01002665 * in this case, the driver must call ieee80211_sta_eosp()
Johannes Berg4b801bc2011-09-29 16:04:40 +02002666 * to indicate to mac80211 that the service period ended anyway.
2667 *
2668 * Finally, if frames from multiple TIDs are released from mac80211
2669 * but the driver might reorder them, it must clear & set the flags
2670 * appropriately (only the last frame may have %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP)
2671 * and also take care of the EOSP and MORE_DATA bits in the frame.
Johannes Berge9437892013-02-15 21:38:08 +01002672 * The driver may also use ieee80211_sta_eosp() in this case.
Johannes Bergb77cf4f2014-01-09 00:00:38 +01002673 *
2674 * Note that if the driver ever buffers frames other than QoS-data
2675 * frames, it must take care to never send a non-QoS-data frame as
2676 * the last frame in a service period, adding a QoS-nulldata frame
2677 * after a non-QoS-data frame if needed.
Johannes Berg4b801bc2011-09-29 16:04:40 +02002678 */
2679
2680/**
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +02002681 * DOC: HW queue control
2682 *
2683 * Before HW queue control was introduced, mac80211 only had a single static
2684 * assignment of per-interface AC software queues to hardware queues. This
2685 * was problematic for a few reasons:
2686 * 1) off-channel transmissions might get stuck behind other frames
2687 * 2) multiple virtual interfaces couldn't be handled correctly
2688 * 3) after-DTIM frames could get stuck behind other frames
2689 *
2690 * To solve this, hardware typically uses multiple different queues for all
2691 * the different usages, and this needs to be propagated into mac80211 so it
2692 * won't have the same problem with the software queues.
2693 *
2694 * Therefore, mac80211 now offers the %IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL capability
2695 * flag that tells it that the driver implements its own queue control. To do
2696 * so, the driver will set up the various queues in each &struct ieee80211_vif
2697 * and the offchannel queue in &struct ieee80211_hw. In response, mac80211 will
2698 * use those queue IDs in the hw_queue field of &struct ieee80211_tx_info and
2699 * if necessary will queue the frame on the right software queue that mirrors
2700 * the hardware queue.
2701 * Additionally, the driver has to then use these HW queue IDs for the queue
2702 * management functions (ieee80211_stop_queue() et al.)
2703 *
2704 * The driver is free to set up the queue mappings as needed, multiple virtual
2705 * interfaces may map to the same hardware queues if needed. The setup has to
2706 * happen during add_interface or change_interface callbacks. For example, a
2707 * driver supporting station+station and station+AP modes might decide to have
2708 * 10 hardware queues to handle different scenarios:
2709 *
2710 * 4 AC HW queues for 1st vif: 0, 1, 2, 3
2711 * 4 AC HW queues for 2nd vif: 4, 5, 6, 7
2712 * after-DTIM queue for AP: 8
2713 * off-channel queue: 9
2714 *
2715 * It would then set up the hardware like this:
2716 * hw.offchannel_tx_hw_queue = 9
2717 *
2718 * and the first virtual interface that is added as follows:
2719 * vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_VO] = 0
2720 * vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_VI] = 1
2721 * vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_BE] = 2
2722 * vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_BK] = 3
2723 * vif.cab_queue = 8 // if AP mode, otherwise %IEEE80211_INVAL_HW_QUEUE
2724 * and the second virtual interface with 4-7.
2725 *
2726 * If queue 6 gets full, for example, mac80211 would only stop the second
2727 * virtual interface's BE queue since virtual interface queues are per AC.
2728 *
2729 * Note that the vif.cab_queue value should be set to %IEEE80211_INVAL_HW_QUEUE
2730 * whenever the queue is not used (i.e. the interface is not in AP mode) if the
2731 * queue could potentially be shared since mac80211 will look at cab_queue when
2732 * a queue is stopped/woken even if the interface is not in AP mode.
2733 */
2734
2735/**
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002736 * enum ieee80211_filter_flags - hardware filter flags
2737 *
2738 * These flags determine what the filter in hardware should be
2739 * programmed to let through and what should not be passed to the
2740 * stack. It is always safe to pass more frames than requested,
2741 * but this has negative impact on power consumption.
2742 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002743 * @FIF_ALLMULTI: pass all multicast frames, this is used if requested
2744 * by the user or if the hardware is not capable of filtering by
2745 * multicast address.
2746 *
2747 * @FIF_FCSFAIL: pass frames with failed FCS (but you need to set the
2748 * %RX_FLAG_FAILED_FCS_CRC for them)
2749 *
2750 * @FIF_PLCPFAIL: pass frames with failed PLCP CRC (but you need to set
2751 * the %RX_FLAG_FAILED_PLCP_CRC for them
2752 *
2753 * @FIF_BCN_PRBRESP_PROMISC: This flag is set during scanning to indicate
2754 * to the hardware that it should not filter beacons or probe responses
2755 * by BSSID. Filtering them can greatly reduce the amount of processing
2756 * mac80211 needs to do and the amount of CPU wakeups, so you should
2757 * honour this flag if possible.
2758 *
Johannes Bergdf140462015-04-22 14:40:58 +02002759 * @FIF_CONTROL: pass control frames (except for PS Poll) addressed to this
2760 * station
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002761 *
2762 * @FIF_OTHER_BSS: pass frames destined to other BSSes
Igor Perminove3b90ca2009-08-04 16:48:51 +04002763 *
Jakub Kicinskic2d39552015-06-02 21:10:13 +02002764 * @FIF_PSPOLL: pass PS Poll frames
Johannes Berg7be50862010-10-13 12:06:24 +02002765 *
2766 * @FIF_PROBE_REQ: pass probe request frames
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002767 */
2768enum ieee80211_filter_flags {
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002769 FIF_ALLMULTI = 1<<1,
2770 FIF_FCSFAIL = 1<<2,
2771 FIF_PLCPFAIL = 1<<3,
2772 FIF_BCN_PRBRESP_PROMISC = 1<<4,
2773 FIF_CONTROL = 1<<5,
2774 FIF_OTHER_BSS = 1<<6,
Igor Perminove3b90ca2009-08-04 16:48:51 +04002775 FIF_PSPOLL = 1<<7,
Johannes Berg7be50862010-10-13 12:06:24 +02002776 FIF_PROBE_REQ = 1<<8,
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002777};
2778
2779/**
Ron Rindjunsky1b7d03a2007-12-25 17:00:31 +02002780 * enum ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action - A-MPDU actions
2781 *
2782 * These flags are used with the ampdu_action() callback in
2783 * &struct ieee80211_ops to indicate which action is needed.
Johannes Berg827d42c2009-11-22 12:28:41 +01002784 *
2785 * Note that drivers MUST be able to deal with a TX aggregation
2786 * session being stopped even before they OK'ed starting it by
Johannes Berg5d22c892010-06-10 10:21:40 +02002787 * calling ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe, because the peer
Johannes Berg827d42c2009-11-22 12:28:41 +01002788 * might receive the addBA frame and send a delBA right away!
2789 *
Johannes Berg18b559d2012-07-18 13:51:25 +02002790 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START: start RX aggregation
2791 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_STOP: stop RX aggregation
2792 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START: start TX aggregation
Johannes Bergb1720232009-03-23 17:28:39 +01002793 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL: TX aggregation has become operational
Johannes Berg18b559d2012-07-18 13:51:25 +02002794 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_CONT: stop TX aggregation but continue transmitting
2795 * queued packets, now unaggregated. After all packets are transmitted the
2796 * driver has to call ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe().
2797 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH: stop TX aggregation and flush all packets,
2798 * called when the station is removed. There's no need or reason to call
2799 * ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe() in this case as mac80211 assumes the
2800 * session is gone and removes the station.
2801 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH_CONT: called when TX aggregation is stopped
2802 * but the driver hasn't called ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe() yet and
2803 * now the connection is dropped and the station will be removed. Drivers
2804 * should clean up and drop remaining packets when this is called.
Ron Rindjunsky1b7d03a2007-12-25 17:00:31 +02002805 */
2806enum ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action {
2807 IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START,
2808 IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_STOP,
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02002809 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START,
Johannes Berg18b559d2012-07-18 13:51:25 +02002810 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_CONT,
2811 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH,
2812 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH_CONT,
Johannes Bergb1720232009-03-23 17:28:39 +01002813 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL,
Ron Rindjunsky1b7d03a2007-12-25 17:00:31 +02002814};
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002815
2816/**
Sara Sharon50ea05e2015-12-30 16:06:04 +02002817 * struct ieee80211_ampdu_params - AMPDU action parameters
2818 *
2819 * @action: the ampdu action, value from %ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action.
2820 * @sta: peer of this AMPDU session
2821 * @tid: tid of the BA session
2822 * @ssn: start sequence number of the session. TX/RX_STOP can pass 0. When
2823 * action is set to %IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START the driver passes back the
2824 * actual ssn value used to start the session and writes the value here.
2825 * @buf_size: reorder buffer size (number of subframes). Valid only when the
2826 * action is set to %IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START or
2827 * %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL
2828 * @amsdu: indicates the peer's ability to receive A-MSDU within A-MPDU.
2829 * valid when the action is set to %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL
2830 * @timeout: BA session timeout. Valid only when the action is set to
2831 * %IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START
2832 */
2833struct ieee80211_ampdu_params {
2834 enum ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action action;
2835 struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
2836 u16 tid;
2837 u16 ssn;
2838 u8 buf_size;
2839 bool amsdu;
2840 u16 timeout;
2841};
2842
2843/**
Johannes Berg4049e092011-09-29 16:04:32 +02002844 * enum ieee80211_frame_release_type - frame release reason
2845 * @IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_PSPOLL: frame released for PS-Poll
Johannes Berg47086fc2011-09-29 16:04:33 +02002846 * @IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_UAPSD: frame(s) released due to
2847 * frame received on trigger-enabled AC
Johannes Berg4049e092011-09-29 16:04:32 +02002848 */
2849enum ieee80211_frame_release_type {
2850 IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_PSPOLL,
Johannes Berg47086fc2011-09-29 16:04:33 +02002851 IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_UAPSD,
Johannes Berg4049e092011-09-29 16:04:32 +02002852};
2853
2854/**
Johannes Berg8f727ef2012-03-30 08:43:32 +02002855 * enum ieee80211_rate_control_changed - flags to indicate what changed
2856 *
2857 * @IEEE80211_RC_BW_CHANGED: The bandwidth that can be used to transmit
Johannes Berge1a0c6b2013-02-07 11:47:44 +01002858 * to this station changed. The actual bandwidth is in the station
2859 * information -- for HT20/40 the IEEE80211_HT_CAP_SUP_WIDTH_20_40
2860 * flag changes, for HT and VHT the bandwidth field changes.
Johannes Berg8f727ef2012-03-30 08:43:32 +02002861 * @IEEE80211_RC_SMPS_CHANGED: The SMPS state of the station changed.
Antonio Quartullie687f612012-08-12 18:24:55 +02002862 * @IEEE80211_RC_SUPP_RATES_CHANGED: The supported rate set of this peer
2863 * changed (in IBSS mode) due to discovering more information about
2864 * the peer.
Johannes Berg0af83d32012-12-27 18:55:36 +01002865 * @IEEE80211_RC_NSS_CHANGED: N_SS (number of spatial streams) was changed
2866 * by the peer
Johannes Berg8f727ef2012-03-30 08:43:32 +02002867 */
2868enum ieee80211_rate_control_changed {
2869 IEEE80211_RC_BW_CHANGED = BIT(0),
2870 IEEE80211_RC_SMPS_CHANGED = BIT(1),
Antonio Quartullie687f612012-08-12 18:24:55 +02002871 IEEE80211_RC_SUPP_RATES_CHANGED = BIT(2),
Johannes Berg0af83d32012-12-27 18:55:36 +01002872 IEEE80211_RC_NSS_CHANGED = BIT(3),
Johannes Berg8f727ef2012-03-30 08:43:32 +02002873};
2874
2875/**
Ilan Peerd339d5c2013-02-12 09:34:13 +02002876 * enum ieee80211_roc_type - remain on channel type
2877 *
2878 * With the support for multi channel contexts and multi channel operations,
2879 * remain on channel operations might be limited/deferred/aborted by other
2880 * flows/operations which have higher priority (and vise versa).
2881 * Specifying the ROC type can be used by devices to prioritize the ROC
2882 * operations compared to other operations/flows.
2883 *
2884 * @IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_NORMAL: There are no special requirements for this ROC.
2885 * @IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_MGMT_TX: The remain on channel request is required
2886 * for sending managment frames offchannel.
2887 */
2888enum ieee80211_roc_type {
2889 IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_NORMAL = 0,
2890 IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_MGMT_TX,
2891};
2892
2893/**
Eliad Pellercf2c92d2014-11-04 11:43:54 +02002894 * enum ieee80211_reconfig_complete_type - reconfig type
2895 *
2896 * This enum is used by the reconfig_complete() callback to indicate what
2897 * reconfiguration type was completed.
2898 *
2899 * @IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_RESTART: hw restart type
2900 * (also due to resume() callback returning 1)
2901 * @IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_SUSPEND: suspend type (regardless
2902 * of wowlan configuration)
2903 */
2904enum ieee80211_reconfig_type {
2905 IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_RESTART,
2906 IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_SUSPEND,
2907};
2908
2909/**
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002910 * struct ieee80211_ops - callbacks from mac80211 to the driver
2911 *
2912 * This structure contains various callbacks that the driver may
2913 * handle or, in some cases, must handle, for example to configure
2914 * the hardware to a new channel or to transmit a frame.
2915 *
2916 * @tx: Handler that 802.11 module calls for each transmitted frame.
2917 * skb contains the buffer starting from the IEEE 802.11 header.
2918 * The low-level driver should send the frame out based on
Johannes Bergeefce912008-05-17 00:57:13 +02002919 * configuration in the TX control data. This handler should,
Johannes Berg11127e92011-11-16 16:02:47 +01002920 * preferably, never fail and stop queues appropriately.
Johannes Berg11127e92011-11-16 16:02:47 +01002921 * Must be atomic.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002922 *
2923 * @start: Called before the first netdevice attached to the hardware
2924 * is enabled. This should turn on the hardware and must turn on
2925 * frame reception (for possibly enabled monitor interfaces.)
2926 * Returns negative error codes, these may be seen in userspace,
2927 * or zero.
2928 * When the device is started it should not have a MAC address
2929 * to avoid acknowledging frames before a non-monitor device
2930 * is added.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002931 * Must be implemented and can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002932 *
2933 * @stop: Called after last netdevice attached to the hardware
2934 * is disabled. This should turn off the hardware (at least
2935 * it must turn off frame reception.)
2936 * May be called right after add_interface if that rejects
Luis R. Rodriguez42935ec2009-07-29 20:08:07 -04002937 * an interface. If you added any work onto the mac80211 workqueue
2938 * you should ensure to cancel it on this callback.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002939 * Must be implemented and can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002940 *
Johannes Bergeecc4802011-05-04 15:37:29 +02002941 * @suspend: Suspend the device; mac80211 itself will quiesce before and
2942 * stop transmitting and doing any other configuration, and then
2943 * ask the device to suspend. This is only invoked when WoWLAN is
2944 * configured, otherwise the device is deconfigured completely and
2945 * reconfigured at resume time.
Johannes Berg2b4562d2011-07-02 00:02:01 +02002946 * The driver may also impose special conditions under which it
2947 * wants to use the "normal" suspend (deconfigure), say if it only
2948 * supports WoWLAN when the device is associated. In this case, it
2949 * must return 1 from this function.
Johannes Bergeecc4802011-05-04 15:37:29 +02002950 *
2951 * @resume: If WoWLAN was configured, this indicates that mac80211 is
2952 * now resuming its operation, after this the device must be fully
2953 * functional again. If this returns an error, the only way out is
2954 * to also unregister the device. If it returns 1, then mac80211
2955 * will also go through the regular complete restart on resume.
2956 *
Johannes Bergd13e1412012-06-09 10:31:09 +02002957 * @set_wakeup: Enable or disable wakeup when WoWLAN configuration is
2958 * modified. The reason is that device_set_wakeup_enable() is
2959 * supposed to be called when the configuration changes, not only
2960 * in suspend().
2961 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002962 * @add_interface: Called when a netdevice attached to the hardware is
Bob Copelande37d4df2008-10-20 21:20:27 -04002963 * enabled. Because it is not called for monitor mode devices, @start
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002964 * and @stop must be implemented.
2965 * The driver should perform any initialization it needs before
2966 * the device can be enabled. The initial configuration for the
2967 * interface is given in the conf parameter.
2968 * The callback may refuse to add an interface by returning a
2969 * negative error code (which will be seen in userspace.)
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002970 * Must be implemented and can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002971 *
Johannes Berg34d4bc42010-08-27 12:35:58 +02002972 * @change_interface: Called when a netdevice changes type. This callback
2973 * is optional, but only if it is supported can interface types be
2974 * switched while the interface is UP. The callback may sleep.
2975 * Note that while an interface is being switched, it will not be
2976 * found by the interface iteration callbacks.
2977 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002978 * @remove_interface: Notifies a driver that an interface is going down.
2979 * The @stop callback is called after this if it is the last interface
2980 * and no monitor interfaces are present.
2981 * When all interfaces are removed, the MAC address in the hardware
2982 * must be cleared so the device no longer acknowledges packets,
2983 * the mac_addr member of the conf structure is, however, set to the
2984 * MAC address of the device going away.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002985 * Hence, this callback must be implemented. It can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002986 *
2987 * @config: Handler for configuration requests. IEEE 802.11 code calls this
2988 * function to change hardware configuration, e.g., channel.
Bob Copeland6dd1bf32009-01-08 21:00:34 -05002989 * This function should never fail but returns a negative error code
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002990 * if it does. The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002991 *
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +01002992 * @bss_info_changed: Handler for configuration requests related to BSS
2993 * parameters that may vary during BSS's lifespan, and may affect low
2994 * level driver (e.g. assoc/disassoc status, erp parameters).
2995 * This function should not be used if no BSS has been set, unless
2996 * for association indication. The @changed parameter indicates which
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002997 * of the bss parameters has changed when a call is made. The callback
2998 * can sleep.
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +01002999 *
Johannes Berg3ac64be2009-08-17 16:16:53 +02003000 * @prepare_multicast: Prepare for multicast filter configuration.
3001 * This callback is optional, and its return value is passed
3002 * to configure_filter(). This callback must be atomic.
3003 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003004 * @configure_filter: Configure the device's RX filter.
3005 * See the section "Frame filtering" for more information.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01003006 * This callback must be implemented and can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003007 *
Andrei Otcheretianski1b09b552015-08-15 22:39:50 +03003008 * @config_iface_filter: Configure the interface's RX filter.
3009 * This callback is optional and is used to configure which frames
3010 * should be passed to mac80211. The filter_flags is the combination
3011 * of FIF_* flags. The changed_flags is a bit mask that indicates
3012 * which flags are changed.
3013 * This callback can sleep.
3014 *
Luis R. Rodriguez546c80c92008-08-14 11:43:20 -07003015 * @set_tim: Set TIM bit. mac80211 calls this function when a TIM bit
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02003016 * must be set or cleared for a given STA. Must be atomic.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003017 *
3018 * @set_key: See the section "Hardware crypto acceleration"
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01003019 * This callback is only called between add_interface and
3020 * remove_interface calls, i.e. while the given virtual interface
Johannes Bergdc822b52008-12-29 12:55:09 +01003021 * is enabled.
Bob Copeland6dd1bf32009-01-08 21:00:34 -05003022 * Returns a negative error code if the key can't be added.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01003023 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003024 *
Emmanuel Grumbach9ae4fda2008-03-20 15:06:42 +02003025 * @update_tkip_key: See the section "Hardware crypto acceleration"
3026 * This callback will be called in the context of Rx. Called for drivers
3027 * which set IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_TKIP_REQ_RX_P1_KEY.
Kalle Valoeb807fb2010-01-24 14:55:12 +02003028 * The callback must be atomic.
Emmanuel Grumbach9ae4fda2008-03-20 15:06:42 +02003029 *
Johannes Bergc68f4b82011-07-05 16:35:41 +02003030 * @set_rekey_data: If the device supports GTK rekeying, for example while the
3031 * host is suspended, it can assign this callback to retrieve the data
3032 * necessary to do GTK rekeying, this is the KEK, KCK and replay counter.
3033 * After rekeying was done it should (for example during resume) notify
3034 * userspace of the new replay counter using ieee80211_gtk_rekey_notify().
3035 *
Yoni Divinskyde5fad82012-05-30 11:36:39 +03003036 * @set_default_unicast_key: Set the default (unicast) key index, useful for
3037 * WEP when the device sends data packets autonomously, e.g. for ARP
3038 * offloading. The index can be 0-3, or -1 for unsetting it.
3039 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003040 * @hw_scan: Ask the hardware to service the scan request, no need to start
Johannes Berg8318d782008-01-24 19:38:38 +01003041 * the scan state machine in stack. The scan must honour the channel
Kalle Valo9050bdd2009-03-22 21:57:21 +02003042 * configuration done by the regulatory agent in the wiphy's
3043 * registered bands. The hardware (or the driver) needs to make sure
Johannes Bergde95a542009-04-01 11:58:36 +02003044 * that power save is disabled.
3045 * The @req ie/ie_len members are rewritten by mac80211 to contain the
3046 * entire IEs after the SSID, so that drivers need not look at these
3047 * at all but just send them after the SSID -- mac80211 includes the
3048 * (extended) supported rates and HT information (where applicable).
3049 * When the scan finishes, ieee80211_scan_completed() must be called;
3050 * note that it also must be called when the scan cannot finish due to
3051 * any error unless this callback returned a negative error code.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01003052 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003053 *
Eliad Pellerb8564392011-06-13 12:47:30 +03003054 * @cancel_hw_scan: Ask the low-level tp cancel the active hw scan.
3055 * The driver should ask the hardware to cancel the scan (if possible),
3056 * but the scan will be completed only after the driver will call
3057 * ieee80211_scan_completed().
3058 * This callback is needed for wowlan, to prevent enqueueing a new
3059 * scan_work after the low-level driver was already suspended.
3060 * The callback can sleep.
3061 *
Luciano Coelho79f460c2011-05-11 17:09:36 +03003062 * @sched_scan_start: Ask the hardware to start scanning repeatedly at
3063 * specific intervals. The driver must call the
3064 * ieee80211_sched_scan_results() function whenever it finds results.
3065 * This process will continue until sched_scan_stop is called.
3066 *
3067 * @sched_scan_stop: Tell the hardware to stop an ongoing scheduled scan.
Johannes Berg37e33082014-02-17 10:48:17 +01003068 * In this case, ieee80211_sched_scan_stopped() must not be called.
Luciano Coelho79f460c2011-05-11 17:09:36 +03003069 *
Michael Buesch80e775b2009-02-20 15:37:03 +01003070 * @sw_scan_start: Notifier function that is called just before a software scan
3071 * is started. Can be NULL, if the driver doesn't need this notification.
Johannes Berga344d672014-06-12 22:24:31 +02003072 * The mac_addr parameter allows supporting NL80211_SCAN_FLAG_RANDOM_ADDR,
3073 * the driver may set the NL80211_FEATURE_SCAN_RANDOM_MAC_ADDR flag if it
3074 * can use this parameter. The callback can sleep.
Michael Buesch80e775b2009-02-20 15:37:03 +01003075 *
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01003076 * @sw_scan_complete: Notifier function that is called just after a
3077 * software scan finished. Can be NULL, if the driver doesn't need
3078 * this notification.
3079 * The callback can sleep.
Michael Buesch80e775b2009-02-20 15:37:03 +01003080 *
Bob Copeland6dd1bf32009-01-08 21:00:34 -05003081 * @get_stats: Return low-level statistics.
3082 * Returns zero if statistics are available.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01003083 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003084 *
Johannes Berg9352c192015-04-20 18:12:41 +02003085 * @get_key_seq: If your device implements encryption in hardware and does
3086 * IV/PN assignment then this callback should be provided to read the
3087 * IV/PN for the given key from hardware.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01003088 * The callback must be atomic.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003089 *
Arik Nemtsovf23a4782010-11-08 11:51:06 +02003090 * @set_frag_threshold: Configuration of fragmentation threshold. Assign this
3091 * if the device does fragmentation by itself; if this callback is
3092 * implemented then the stack will not do fragmentation.
3093 * The callback can sleep.
3094 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003095 * @set_rts_threshold: Configuration of RTS threshold (if device needs it)
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01003096 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003097 *
Johannes Berg34e89502010-02-03 13:59:58 +01003098 * @sta_add: Notifies low level driver about addition of an associated station,
3099 * AP, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc. This callback can sleep.
3100 *
3101 * @sta_remove: Notifies low level driver about removal of an associated
Johannes Berg6a9d1b92013-12-04 22:39:17 +01003102 * station, AP, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc. Note that after the callback
3103 * returns it isn't safe to use the pointer, not even RCU protected;
3104 * no RCU grace period is guaranteed between returning here and freeing
3105 * the station. See @sta_pre_rcu_remove if needed.
3106 * This callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg34e89502010-02-03 13:59:58 +01003107 *
Sujith Manoharan77d2ece2012-11-20 08:46:02 +05303108 * @sta_add_debugfs: Drivers can use this callback to add debugfs files
3109 * when a station is added to mac80211's station list. This callback
Johannes Bergc7e9dbc2016-09-14 10:03:00 +02003110 * should be within a CONFIG_MAC80211_DEBUGFS conditional. This
3111 * callback can sleep.
Sujith Manoharan77d2ece2012-11-20 08:46:02 +05303112 *
Johannes Berg34e89502010-02-03 13:59:58 +01003113 * @sta_notify: Notifies low level driver about power state transition of an
Arik Nemtsovd057e5a2011-01-31 22:29:13 +02003114 * associated station, AP, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc. For a VIF operating
3115 * in AP mode, this callback will not be called when the flag
3116 * %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS is set. Must be atomic.
Christian Lamparter4571d3b2008-11-30 00:48:41 +01003117 *
Johannes Bergf09603a2012-01-20 13:55:21 +01003118 * @sta_state: Notifies low level driver about state transition of a
3119 * station (which can be the AP, a client, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc.)
3120 * This callback is mutually exclusive with @sta_add/@sta_remove.
3121 * It must not fail for down transitions but may fail for transitions
Johannes Berg6a9d1b92013-12-04 22:39:17 +01003122 * up the list of states. Also note that after the callback returns it
3123 * isn't safe to use the pointer, not even RCU protected - no RCU grace
3124 * period is guaranteed between returning here and freeing the station.
3125 * See @sta_pre_rcu_remove if needed.
3126 * The callback can sleep.
3127 *
3128 * @sta_pre_rcu_remove: Notify driver about station removal before RCU
3129 * synchronisation. This is useful if a driver needs to have station
3130 * pointers protected using RCU, it can then use this call to clear
3131 * the pointers instead of waiting for an RCU grace period to elapse
3132 * in @sta_state.
Johannes Bergf09603a2012-01-20 13:55:21 +01003133 * The callback can sleep.
3134 *
Johannes Berg8f727ef2012-03-30 08:43:32 +02003135 * @sta_rc_update: Notifies the driver of changes to the bitrates that can be
3136 * used to transmit to the station. The changes are advertised with bits
3137 * from &enum ieee80211_rate_control_changed and the values are reflected
3138 * in the station data. This callback should only be used when the driver
3139 * uses hardware rate control (%IEEE80211_HW_HAS_RATE_CONTROL) since
3140 * otherwise the rate control algorithm is notified directly.
3141 * Must be atomic.
Johannes Bergf815e2b2014-11-19 00:10:42 +01003142 * @sta_rate_tbl_update: Notifies the driver that the rate table changed. This
3143 * is only used if the configured rate control algorithm actually uses
3144 * the new rate table API, and is therefore optional. Must be atomic.
Johannes Berg8f727ef2012-03-30 08:43:32 +02003145 *
Johannes Berg2b9a7e12014-11-17 11:35:23 +01003146 * @sta_statistics: Get statistics for this station. For example with beacon
3147 * filtering, the statistics kept by mac80211 might not be accurate, so
3148 * let the driver pre-fill the statistics. The driver can fill most of
3149 * the values (indicating which by setting the filled bitmap), but not
3150 * all of them make sense - see the source for which ones are possible.
3151 * Statistics that the driver doesn't fill will be filled by mac80211.
3152 * The callback can sleep.
3153 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003154 * @conf_tx: Configure TX queue parameters (EDCF (aifs, cw_min, cw_max),
Johannes Bergfe3fa822008-09-08 11:05:09 +02003155 * bursting) for a hardware TX queue.
Bob Copeland6dd1bf32009-01-08 21:00:34 -05003156 * Returns a negative error code on failure.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01003157 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003158 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003159 * @get_tsf: Get the current TSF timer value from firmware/hardware. Currently,
Alina Friedrichsen3b5d6652009-01-24 07:09:59 +01003160 * this is only used for IBSS mode BSSID merging and debugging. Is not a
Alina Friedrichsen7b08b3b2009-02-05 17:58:34 +01003161 * required function.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01003162 * The callback can sleep.
Alina Friedrichsen3b5d6652009-01-24 07:09:59 +01003163 *
3164 * @set_tsf: Set the TSF timer to the specified value in the firmware/hardware.
Johannes Bergad24b0d2013-07-05 11:53:28 +02003165 * Currently, this is only used for IBSS mode debugging. Is not a
Alina Friedrichsen7b08b3b2009-02-05 17:58:34 +01003166 * required function.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01003167 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003168 *
3169 * @reset_tsf: Reset the TSF timer and allow firmware/hardware to synchronize
3170 * with other STAs in the IBSS. This is only used in IBSS mode. This
3171 * function is optional if the firmware/hardware takes full care of
3172 * TSF synchronization.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01003173 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003174 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003175 * @tx_last_beacon: Determine whether the last IBSS beacon was sent by us.
3176 * This is needed only for IBSS mode and the result of this function is
3177 * used to determine whether to reply to Probe Requests.
Bob Copeland6dd1bf32009-01-08 21:00:34 -05003178 * Returns non-zero if this device sent the last beacon.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01003179 * The callback can sleep.
Ron Rindjunskyd3c990f2007-11-26 16:14:34 +02003180 *
Ron Rindjunsky1b7d03a2007-12-25 17:00:31 +02003181 * @ampdu_action: Perform a certain A-MPDU action
3182 * The RA/TID combination determines the destination and TID we want
3183 * the ampdu action to be performed for. The action is defined through
Sara Sharon50ea05e2015-12-30 16:06:04 +02003184 * ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action.
Sara Sharonfad47182015-12-08 16:04:34 +02003185 * When the action is set to %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL the driver
Sara Sharon50ea05e2015-12-30 16:06:04 +02003186 * may neither send aggregates containing more subframes than @buf_size
Johannes Berg5312c3f2011-04-01 13:52:34 +02003187 * nor send aggregates in a way that lost frames would exceed the
3188 * buffer size. If just limiting the aggregate size, this would be
3189 * possible with a buf_size of 8:
3190 * - TX: 1.....7
3191 * - RX: 2....7 (lost frame #1)
3192 * - TX: 8..1...
3193 * which is invalid since #1 was now re-transmitted well past the
3194 * buffer size of 8. Correct ways to retransmit #1 would be:
3195 * - TX: 1 or 18 or 81
3196 * Even "189" would be wrong since 1 could be lost again.
3197 *
Bob Copeland6dd1bf32009-01-08 21:00:34 -05003198 * Returns a negative error code on failure.
Johannes Berg85ad1812010-06-10 10:21:49 +02003199 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg1f87f7d2009-06-02 13:01:41 +02003200 *
Randy Dunlap4e8998f2010-05-21 11:28:33 -07003201 * @get_survey: Return per-channel survey information
3202 *
Johannes Berg1f87f7d2009-06-02 13:01:41 +02003203 * @rfkill_poll: Poll rfkill hardware state. If you need this, you also
3204 * need to set wiphy->rfkill_poll to %true before registration,
3205 * and need to call wiphy_rfkill_set_hw_state() in the callback.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01003206 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Bergaff89a92009-07-01 21:26:51 +02003207 *
Lukáš Turek310bc672009-12-21 22:50:48 +01003208 * @set_coverage_class: Set slot time for given coverage class as specified
3209 * in IEEE 802.11-2007 section 17.3.8.6 and modify ACK timeout
Lorenzo Bianconia4bcaf52014-09-04 23:57:41 +02003210 * accordingly; coverage class equals to -1 to enable ACK timeout
3211 * estimation algorithm (dynack). To disable dynack set valid value for
3212 * coverage class. This callback is not required and may sleep.
Lukáš Turek310bc672009-12-21 22:50:48 +01003213 *
David Spinadel52981cd2013-07-31 18:06:22 +03003214 * @testmode_cmd: Implement a cfg80211 test mode command. The passed @vif may
3215 * be %NULL. The callback can sleep.
Wey-Yi Guy71063f02011-05-20 09:05:54 -07003216 * @testmode_dump: Implement a cfg80211 test mode dump. The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berga80f7c02009-12-23 13:15:32 +01003217 *
3218 * @flush: Flush all pending frames from the hardware queue, making sure
Johannes Berg39ecc012013-02-13 12:11:00 +01003219 * that the hardware queues are empty. The @queues parameter is a bitmap
3220 * of queues to flush, which is useful if different virtual interfaces
3221 * use different hardware queues; it may also indicate all queues.
3222 * If the parameter @drop is set to %true, pending frames may be dropped.
Emmanuel Grumbach77be2c52014-03-27 11:30:29 +02003223 * Note that vif can be NULL.
Johannes Berg39ecc012013-02-13 12:11:00 +01003224 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02003225 *
3226 * @channel_switch: Drivers that need (or want) to offload the channel
3227 * switch operation for CSAs received from the AP may implement this
3228 * callback. They must then call ieee80211_chswitch_done() to indicate
3229 * completion of the channel switch.
John W. Linville4e6cbfd2010-07-29 16:14:13 -04003230 *
Bruno Randolf79b1c462010-11-24 14:34:41 +09003231 * @set_antenna: Set antenna configuration (tx_ant, rx_ant) on the device.
3232 * Parameters are bitmaps of allowed antennas to use for TX/RX. Drivers may
3233 * reject TX/RX mask combinations they cannot support by returning -EINVAL
3234 * (also see nl80211.h @NL80211_ATTR_WIPHY_ANTENNA_TX).
3235 *
3236 * @get_antenna: Get current antenna configuration from device (tx_ant, rx_ant).
Johannes Berg4976b4e2011-01-04 13:02:32 +01003237 *
3238 * @remain_on_channel: Starts an off-channel period on the given channel, must
3239 * call back to ieee80211_ready_on_channel() when on that channel. Note
3240 * that normal channel traffic is not stopped as this is intended for hw
3241 * offload. Frames to transmit on the off-channel channel are transmitted
3242 * normally except for the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_TX_OFFCHAN flag. When the
3243 * duration (which will always be non-zero) expires, the driver must call
Johannes Berg196ac1c2012-06-05 14:28:40 +02003244 * ieee80211_remain_on_channel_expired().
Johannes Berg196ac1c2012-06-05 14:28:40 +02003245 * Note that this callback may be called while the device is in IDLE and
3246 * must be accepted in this case.
3247 * This callback may sleep.
Johannes Berg4976b4e2011-01-04 13:02:32 +01003248 * @cancel_remain_on_channel: Requests that an ongoing off-channel period is
3249 * aborted before it expires. This callback may sleep.
John W. Linville38c09152011-03-07 16:19:18 -05003250 *
3251 * @set_ringparam: Set tx and rx ring sizes.
3252 *
3253 * @get_ringparam: Get tx and rx ring current and maximum sizes.
Vivek Natarajane8306f92011-04-06 11:41:10 +05303254 *
3255 * @tx_frames_pending: Check if there is any pending frame in the hardware
3256 * queues before entering power save.
Sujith Manoharanbdbfd6b2011-04-27 16:56:51 +05303257 *
3258 * @set_bitrate_mask: Set a mask of rates to be used for rate control selection
3259 * when transmitting a frame. Currently only legacy rates are handled.
3260 * The callback can sleep.
Emmanuel Grumbacha8182922015-03-16 23:23:34 +02003261 * @event_callback: Notify driver about any event in mac80211. See
3262 * &enum ieee80211_event_type for the different types.
Emmanuel Grumbach63822462015-04-20 22:53:37 +03003263 * The callback must be atomic.
Johannes Berg4049e092011-09-29 16:04:32 +02003264 *
3265 * @release_buffered_frames: Release buffered frames according to the given
3266 * parameters. In the case where the driver buffers some frames for
3267 * sleeping stations mac80211 will use this callback to tell the driver
3268 * to release some frames, either for PS-poll or uAPSD.
Masanari Iidae2278672014-02-18 22:54:36 +09003269 * Note that if the @more_data parameter is %false the driver must check
Johannes Berg4049e092011-09-29 16:04:32 +02003270 * if there are more frames on the given TIDs, and if there are more than
3271 * the frames being released then it must still set the more-data bit in
3272 * the frame. If the @more_data parameter is %true, then of course the
3273 * more-data bit must always be set.
3274 * The @tids parameter tells the driver which TIDs to release frames
3275 * from, for PS-poll it will always have only a single bit set.
Johannes Bergdeeaee12011-09-29 16:04:35 +02003276 * In the case this is used for a PS-poll initiated release, the
3277 * @num_frames parameter will always be 1 so code can be shared. In
3278 * this case the driver must also set %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP flag
3279 * on the TX status (and must report TX status) so that the PS-poll
3280 * period is properly ended. This is used to avoid sending multiple
3281 * responses for a retried PS-poll frame.
Johannes Berg4049e092011-09-29 16:04:32 +02003282 * In the case this is used for uAPSD, the @num_frames parameter may be
3283 * bigger than one, but the driver may send fewer frames (it must send
3284 * at least one, however). In this case it is also responsible for
Johannes Berg47086fc2011-09-29 16:04:33 +02003285 * setting the EOSP flag in the QoS header of the frames. Also, when the
3286 * service period ends, the driver must set %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP
Johannes Berg37fbd902011-09-29 16:04:39 +02003287 * on the last frame in the SP. Alternatively, it may call the function
Johannes Berge9437892013-02-15 21:38:08 +01003288 * ieee80211_sta_eosp() to inform mac80211 of the end of the SP.
Johannes Berg4049e092011-09-29 16:04:32 +02003289 * This callback must be atomic.
Johannes Berg40b96402011-09-29 16:04:38 +02003290 * @allow_buffered_frames: Prepare device to allow the given number of frames
3291 * to go out to the given station. The frames will be sent by mac80211
3292 * via the usual TX path after this call. The TX information for frames
Johannes Berg02f2f1a2012-02-27 12:18:30 +01003293 * released will also have the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER flag set
Johannes Berg40b96402011-09-29 16:04:38 +02003294 * and the last one will also have %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP set. In case
3295 * frames from multiple TIDs are released and the driver might reorder
3296 * them between the TIDs, it must set the %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP flag
3297 * on the last frame and clear it on all others and also handle the EOSP
Johannes Berg37fbd902011-09-29 16:04:39 +02003298 * bit in the QoS header correctly. Alternatively, it can also call the
Johannes Berge9437892013-02-15 21:38:08 +01003299 * ieee80211_sta_eosp() function.
Johannes Berg40b96402011-09-29 16:04:38 +02003300 * The @tids parameter is a bitmap and tells the driver which TIDs the
3301 * frames will be on; it will at most have two bits set.
3302 * This callback must be atomic.
Ben Greeare3521142012-04-23 12:50:31 -07003303 *
3304 * @get_et_sset_count: Ethtool API to get string-set count.
3305 *
3306 * @get_et_stats: Ethtool API to get a set of u64 stats.
3307 *
3308 * @get_et_strings: Ethtool API to get a set of strings to describe stats
3309 * and perhaps other supported types of ethtool data-sets.
3310 *
Johannes Berga1845fc2012-06-27 13:18:36 +02003311 * @mgd_prepare_tx: Prepare for transmitting a management frame for association
3312 * before associated. In multi-channel scenarios, a virtual interface is
3313 * bound to a channel before it is associated, but as it isn't associated
3314 * yet it need not necessarily be given airtime, in particular since any
3315 * transmission to a P2P GO needs to be synchronized against the GO's
3316 * powersave state. mac80211 will call this function before transmitting a
3317 * management frame prior to having successfully associated to allow the
3318 * driver to give it channel time for the transmission, to get a response
3319 * and to be able to synchronize with the GO.
3320 * The callback will be called before each transmission and upon return
3321 * mac80211 will transmit the frame right away.
3322 * The callback is optional and can (should!) sleep.
Michal Kaziorc3645ea2012-06-26 14:37:17 +02003323 *
Arik Nemtsovee10f2c2014-06-11 17:18:27 +03003324 * @mgd_protect_tdls_discover: Protect a TDLS discovery session. After sending
3325 * a TDLS discovery-request, we expect a reply to arrive on the AP's
3326 * channel. We must stay on the channel (no PSM, scan, etc.), since a TDLS
3327 * setup-response is a direct packet not buffered by the AP.
3328 * mac80211 will call this function just before the transmission of a TDLS
3329 * discovery-request. The recommended period of protection is at least
3330 * 2 * (DTIM period).
3331 * The callback is optional and can sleep.
3332 *
Michal Kaziorc3645ea2012-06-26 14:37:17 +02003333 * @add_chanctx: Notifies device driver about new channel context creation.
Chaitanya T Kdcae9e02015-10-30 23:16:15 +05303334 * This callback may sleep.
Michal Kaziorc3645ea2012-06-26 14:37:17 +02003335 * @remove_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context destruction.
Chaitanya T Kdcae9e02015-10-30 23:16:15 +05303336 * This callback may sleep.
Michal Kaziorc3645ea2012-06-26 14:37:17 +02003337 * @change_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context changes that
3338 * may happen when combining different virtual interfaces on the same
3339 * channel context with different settings
Chaitanya T Kdcae9e02015-10-30 23:16:15 +05303340 * This callback may sleep.
Michal Kaziorc3645ea2012-06-26 14:37:17 +02003341 * @assign_vif_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context being bound
3342 * to vif. Possible use is for hw queue remapping.
Chaitanya T Kdcae9e02015-10-30 23:16:15 +05303343 * This callback may sleep.
Michal Kaziorc3645ea2012-06-26 14:37:17 +02003344 * @unassign_vif_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context being
3345 * unbound from vif.
Chaitanya T Kdcae9e02015-10-30 23:16:15 +05303346 * This callback may sleep.
Luciano Coelho1a5f0c12014-05-23 14:33:12 +03003347 * @switch_vif_chanctx: switch a number of vifs from one chanctx to
3348 * another, as specified in the list of
3349 * @ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch passed to the driver, according
3350 * to the mode defined in &ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode.
Chaitanya T Kdcae9e02015-10-30 23:16:15 +05303351 * This callback may sleep.
Luciano Coelho1a5f0c12014-05-23 14:33:12 +03003352 *
Johannes Berg10416382012-10-19 15:44:42 +02003353 * @start_ap: Start operation on the AP interface, this is called after all the
3354 * information in bss_conf is set and beacon can be retrieved. A channel
3355 * context is bound before this is called. Note that if the driver uses
3356 * software scan or ROC, this (and @stop_ap) isn't called when the AP is
3357 * just "paused" for scanning/ROC, which is indicated by the beacon being
3358 * disabled/enabled via @bss_info_changed.
3359 * @stop_ap: Stop operation on the AP interface.
Johannes Berg9214ad72012-11-06 19:18:13 +01003360 *
Eliad Pellercf2c92d2014-11-04 11:43:54 +02003361 * @reconfig_complete: Called after a call to ieee80211_restart_hw() and
3362 * during resume, when the reconfiguration has completed.
3363 * This can help the driver implement the reconfiguration step (and
3364 * indicate mac80211 is ready to receive frames).
3365 * This callback may sleep.
Johannes Berg8f21b0a2013-01-11 00:28:01 +01003366 *
Johannes Berga65240c2013-01-14 15:14:34 +01003367 * @ipv6_addr_change: IPv6 address assignment on the given interface changed.
3368 * Currently, this is only called for managed or P2P client interfaces.
3369 * This callback is optional; it must not sleep.
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +02003370 *
3371 * @channel_switch_beacon: Starts a channel switch to a new channel.
3372 * Beacons are modified to include CSA or ECSA IEs before calling this
3373 * function. The corresponding count fields in these IEs must be
Luciano Coelho66e01cf2014-01-13 19:43:00 +02003374 * decremented, and when they reach 1 the driver must call
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +02003375 * ieee80211_csa_finish(). Drivers which use ieee80211_beacon_get()
3376 * get the csa counter decremented by mac80211, but must check if it is
Luciano Coelho66e01cf2014-01-13 19:43:00 +02003377 * 1 using ieee80211_csa_is_complete() after the beacon has been
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +02003378 * transmitted and then call ieee80211_csa_finish().
Luciano Coelho66e01cf2014-01-13 19:43:00 +02003379 * If the CSA count starts as zero or 1, this function will not be called,
3380 * since there won't be any time to beacon before the switch anyway.
Luciano Coelho6d027bc2014-10-08 09:48:37 +03003381 * @pre_channel_switch: This is an optional callback that is called
3382 * before a channel switch procedure is started (ie. when a STA
3383 * gets a CSA or an userspace initiated channel-switch), allowing
3384 * the driver to prepare for the channel switch.
Luciano Coelhof1d65582014-10-08 09:48:38 +03003385 * @post_channel_switch: This is an optional callback that is called
3386 * after a channel switch procedure is completed, allowing the
3387 * driver to go back to a normal configuration.
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +02003388 *
Johannes Berg55fff502013-08-19 18:48:41 +02003389 * @join_ibss: Join an IBSS (on an IBSS interface); this is called after all
3390 * information in bss_conf is set up and the beacon can be retrieved. A
3391 * channel context is bound before this is called.
3392 * @leave_ibss: Leave the IBSS again.
Antonio Quartullicca674d2014-05-19 21:53:20 +02003393 *
3394 * @get_expected_throughput: extract the expected throughput towards the
3395 * specified station. The returned value is expressed in Kbps. It returns 0
3396 * if the RC algorithm does not have proper data to provide.
Felix Fietkau5b3dc422014-10-26 00:32:53 +02003397 *
3398 * @get_txpower: get current maximum tx power (in dBm) based on configuration
3399 * and hardware limits.
Arik Nemtsova7a6bdd2014-11-09 18:50:19 +02003400 *
3401 * @tdls_channel_switch: Start channel-switching with a TDLS peer. The driver
3402 * is responsible for continually initiating channel-switching operations
3403 * and returning to the base channel for communication with the AP. The
3404 * driver receives a channel-switch request template and the location of
3405 * the switch-timing IE within the template as part of the invocation.
3406 * The template is valid only within the call, and the driver can
3407 * optionally copy the skb for further re-use.
3408 * @tdls_cancel_channel_switch: Stop channel-switching with a TDLS peer. Both
3409 * peers must be on the base channel when the call completes.
Arik Nemtsov8a4d32f2014-11-09 18:50:20 +02003410 * @tdls_recv_channel_switch: a TDLS channel-switch related frame (request or
3411 * response) has been received from a remote peer. The driver gets
3412 * parameters parsed from the incoming frame and may use them to continue
3413 * an ongoing channel-switch operation. In addition, a channel-switch
3414 * response template is provided, together with the location of the
3415 * switch-timing IE within the template. The skb can only be used within
3416 * the function call.
Felix Fietkauba8c3d62015-03-27 21:30:37 +01003417 *
3418 * @wake_tx_queue: Called when new packets have been added to the queue.
Sara Sharonf59374e2016-03-02 23:46:14 +02003419 * @sync_rx_queues: Process all pending frames in RSS queues. This is a
3420 * synchronization which is needed in case driver has in its RSS queues
3421 * pending frames that were received prior to the control path action
3422 * currently taken (e.g. disassociation) but are not processed yet.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003423 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003424struct ieee80211_ops {
Thomas Huehn36323f82012-07-23 21:33:42 +02003425 void (*tx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3426 struct ieee80211_tx_control *control,
3427 struct sk_buff *skb);
Johannes Berg4150c572007-09-17 01:29:23 -04003428 int (*start)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
Johannes Berg4150c572007-09-17 01:29:23 -04003429 void (*stop)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
Johannes Bergeecc4802011-05-04 15:37:29 +02003430#ifdef CONFIG_PM
3431 int (*suspend)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct cfg80211_wowlan *wowlan);
3432 int (*resume)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
Johannes Berg6d525632012-04-04 15:05:25 +02003433 void (*set_wakeup)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, bool enabled);
Johannes Bergeecc4802011-05-04 15:37:29 +02003434#endif
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003435 int (*add_interface)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01003436 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Johannes Berg34d4bc42010-08-27 12:35:58 +02003437 int (*change_interface)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3438 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Johannes Berg2ca27bc2010-09-16 14:58:23 +02003439 enum nl80211_iftype new_type, bool p2p);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003440 void (*remove_interface)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01003441 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +02003442 int (*config)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 changed);
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +01003443 void (*bss_info_changed)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3444 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3445 struct ieee80211_bss_conf *info,
3446 u32 changed);
Johannes Bergb2abb6e2011-07-19 10:39:53 +02003447
Johannes Berg10416382012-10-19 15:44:42 +02003448 int (*start_ap)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3449 void (*stop_ap)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3450
Johannes Berg3ac64be2009-08-17 16:16:53 +02003451 u64 (*prepare_multicast)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Jiri Pirko22bedad32010-04-01 21:22:57 +00003452 struct netdev_hw_addr_list *mc_list);
Johannes Berg4150c572007-09-17 01:29:23 -04003453 void (*configure_filter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3454 unsigned int changed_flags,
3455 unsigned int *total_flags,
Johannes Berg3ac64be2009-08-17 16:16:53 +02003456 u64 multicast);
Andrei Otcheretianski1b09b552015-08-15 22:39:50 +03003457 void (*config_iface_filter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3458 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3459 unsigned int filter_flags,
3460 unsigned int changed_flags);
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02003461 int (*set_tim)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3462 bool set);
Johannes Bergea49c352007-09-18 17:29:21 -04003463 int (*set_key)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, enum set_key_cmd cmd,
Johannes Bergdc822b52008-12-29 12:55:09 +01003464 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
Johannes Berg11a843b2007-08-28 17:01:55 -04003465 struct ieee80211_key_conf *key);
Emmanuel Grumbach9ae4fda2008-03-20 15:06:42 +02003466 void (*update_tkip_key)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Bergb3fbdcf2010-01-21 11:40:47 +01003467 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3468 struct ieee80211_key_conf *conf,
3469 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3470 u32 iv32, u16 *phase1key);
Johannes Bergc68f4b82011-07-05 16:35:41 +02003471 void (*set_rekey_data)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3472 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3473 struct cfg80211_gtk_rekey_data *data);
Yoni Divinskyde5fad82012-05-30 11:36:39 +03003474 void (*set_default_unicast_key)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3475 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, int idx);
Johannes Berga060bbf2010-04-27 11:59:34 +02003476 int (*hw_scan)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
David Spinadelc56ef672014-02-05 15:21:13 +02003477 struct ieee80211_scan_request *req);
Eliad Pellerb8564392011-06-13 12:47:30 +03003478 void (*cancel_hw_scan)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3479 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Luciano Coelho79f460c2011-05-11 17:09:36 +03003480 int (*sched_scan_start)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3481 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3482 struct cfg80211_sched_scan_request *req,
David Spinadel633e2712014-02-06 16:15:23 +02003483 struct ieee80211_scan_ies *ies);
Johannes Berg37e33082014-02-17 10:48:17 +01003484 int (*sched_scan_stop)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Luciano Coelho79f460c2011-05-11 17:09:36 +03003485 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Johannes Berga344d672014-06-12 22:24:31 +02003486 void (*sw_scan_start)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3487 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3488 const u8 *mac_addr);
3489 void (*sw_scan_complete)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3490 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003491 int (*get_stats)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3492 struct ieee80211_low_level_stats *stats);
Johannes Berg9352c192015-04-20 18:12:41 +02003493 void (*get_key_seq)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3494 struct ieee80211_key_conf *key,
3495 struct ieee80211_key_seq *seq);
Arik Nemtsovf23a4782010-11-08 11:51:06 +02003496 int (*set_frag_threshold)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 value);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003497 int (*set_rts_threshold)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 value);
Johannes Berg34e89502010-02-03 13:59:58 +01003498 int (*sta_add)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3499 struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
3500 int (*sta_remove)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3501 struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
Sujith Manoharan77d2ece2012-11-20 08:46:02 +05303502#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_DEBUGFS
3503 void (*sta_add_debugfs)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3504 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3505 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3506 struct dentry *dir);
Sujith Manoharan77d2ece2012-11-20 08:46:02 +05303507#endif
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01003508 void (*sta_notify)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02003509 enum sta_notify_cmd, struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
Johannes Bergf09603a2012-01-20 13:55:21 +01003510 int (*sta_state)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3511 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3512 enum ieee80211_sta_state old_state,
3513 enum ieee80211_sta_state new_state);
Johannes Berg6a9d1b92013-12-04 22:39:17 +01003514 void (*sta_pre_rcu_remove)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3515 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3516 struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
Johannes Berg8f727ef2012-03-30 08:43:32 +02003517 void (*sta_rc_update)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3518 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3519 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3520 u32 changed);
Johannes Bergf815e2b2014-11-19 00:10:42 +01003521 void (*sta_rate_tbl_update)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3522 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3523 struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
Johannes Berg2b9a7e12014-11-17 11:35:23 +01003524 void (*sta_statistics)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3525 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3526 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3527 struct station_info *sinfo);
Eliad Peller8a3a3c82011-10-02 10:15:52 +02003528 int (*conf_tx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berga3304b02012-03-28 11:04:24 +02003529 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u16 ac,
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003530 const struct ieee80211_tx_queue_params *params);
Eliad Peller37a41b42011-09-21 14:06:11 +03003531 u64 (*get_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3532 void (*set_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3533 u64 tsf);
3534 void (*reset_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003535 int (*tx_last_beacon)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
Ron Rindjunsky1b7d03a2007-12-25 17:00:31 +02003536 int (*ampdu_action)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Bergc951ad32009-11-16 12:00:38 +01003537 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Sara Sharon50ea05e2015-12-30 16:06:04 +02003538 struct ieee80211_ampdu_params *params);
Holger Schurig12897232010-04-19 10:23:57 +02003539 int (*get_survey)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int idx,
3540 struct survey_info *survey);
Johannes Berg1f87f7d2009-06-02 13:01:41 +02003541 void (*rfkill_poll)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
Lorenzo Bianconia4bcaf52014-09-04 23:57:41 +02003542 void (*set_coverage_class)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, s16 coverage_class);
Johannes Bergaff89a92009-07-01 21:26:51 +02003543#ifdef CONFIG_NL80211_TESTMODE
David Spinadel52981cd2013-07-31 18:06:22 +03003544 int (*testmode_cmd)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3545 void *data, int len);
Wey-Yi Guy71063f02011-05-20 09:05:54 -07003546 int (*testmode_dump)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb,
3547 struct netlink_callback *cb,
3548 void *data, int len);
Johannes Bergaff89a92009-07-01 21:26:51 +02003549#endif
Emmanuel Grumbach77be2c52014-03-27 11:30:29 +02003550 void (*flush)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3551 u32 queues, bool drop);
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02003552 void (*channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Luciano Coelho0f791eb42014-10-08 09:48:40 +03003553 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02003554 struct ieee80211_channel_switch *ch_switch);
Bruno Randolf15d96752010-11-10 12:50:56 +09003555 int (*set_antenna)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 tx_ant, u32 rx_ant);
3556 int (*get_antenna)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 *tx_ant, u32 *rx_ant);
Johannes Berg21f83582010-12-18 17:20:47 +01003557
3558 int (*remain_on_channel)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Eliad Peller49884562012-11-19 17:05:09 +02003559 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Johannes Berg21f83582010-12-18 17:20:47 +01003560 struct ieee80211_channel *chan,
Ilan Peerd339d5c2013-02-12 09:34:13 +02003561 int duration,
3562 enum ieee80211_roc_type type);
Johannes Berg21f83582010-12-18 17:20:47 +01003563 int (*cancel_remain_on_channel)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
John W. Linville38c09152011-03-07 16:19:18 -05003564 int (*set_ringparam)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 tx, u32 rx);
3565 void (*get_ringparam)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3566 u32 *tx, u32 *tx_max, u32 *rx, u32 *rx_max);
Vivek Natarajane8306f92011-04-06 11:41:10 +05303567 bool (*tx_frames_pending)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
Sujith Manoharanbdbfd6b2011-04-27 16:56:51 +05303568 int (*set_bitrate_mask)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3569 const struct cfg80211_bitrate_mask *mask);
Emmanuel Grumbacha8182922015-03-16 23:23:34 +02003570 void (*event_callback)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3571 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3572 const struct ieee80211_event *event);
Johannes Berg4049e092011-09-29 16:04:32 +02003573
Johannes Berg40b96402011-09-29 16:04:38 +02003574 void (*allow_buffered_frames)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3575 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3576 u16 tids, int num_frames,
3577 enum ieee80211_frame_release_type reason,
3578 bool more_data);
Johannes Berg4049e092011-09-29 16:04:32 +02003579 void (*release_buffered_frames)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3580 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3581 u16 tids, int num_frames,
3582 enum ieee80211_frame_release_type reason,
3583 bool more_data);
Ben Greeare3521142012-04-23 12:50:31 -07003584
3585 int (*get_et_sset_count)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3586 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, int sset);
3587 void (*get_et_stats)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3588 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3589 struct ethtool_stats *stats, u64 *data);
3590 void (*get_et_strings)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3591 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3592 u32 sset, u8 *data);
Johannes Berga1845fc2012-06-27 13:18:36 +02003593
3594 void (*mgd_prepare_tx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3595 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Michal Kaziorc3645ea2012-06-26 14:37:17 +02003596
Arik Nemtsovee10f2c2014-06-11 17:18:27 +03003597 void (*mgd_protect_tdls_discover)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3598 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3599
Michal Kaziorc3645ea2012-06-26 14:37:17 +02003600 int (*add_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3601 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx);
3602 void (*remove_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3603 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx);
3604 void (*change_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3605 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx,
3606 u32 changed);
3607 int (*assign_vif_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3608 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3609 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx);
3610 void (*unassign_vif_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3611 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3612 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx);
Luciano Coelho1a5f0c12014-05-23 14:33:12 +03003613 int (*switch_vif_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3614 struct ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch *vifs,
3615 int n_vifs,
3616 enum ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode mode);
Johannes Berg9214ad72012-11-06 19:18:13 +01003617
Eliad Pellercf2c92d2014-11-04 11:43:54 +02003618 void (*reconfig_complete)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3619 enum ieee80211_reconfig_type reconfig_type);
Johannes Berga65240c2013-01-14 15:14:34 +01003620
3621#if IS_ENABLED(CONFIG_IPV6)
3622 void (*ipv6_addr_change)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3623 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3624 struct inet6_dev *idev);
3625#endif
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +02003626 void (*channel_switch_beacon)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3627 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3628 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef);
Luciano Coelho6d027bc2014-10-08 09:48:37 +03003629 int (*pre_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3630 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3631 struct ieee80211_channel_switch *ch_switch);
Johannes Berg55fff502013-08-19 18:48:41 +02003632
Luciano Coelhof1d65582014-10-08 09:48:38 +03003633 int (*post_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3634 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3635
Johannes Berg55fff502013-08-19 18:48:41 +02003636 int (*join_ibss)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3637 void (*leave_ibss)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Maxim Altshul2439ca02016-08-04 15:43:04 +03003638 u32 (*get_expected_throughput)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3639 struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
Felix Fietkau5b3dc422014-10-26 00:32:53 +02003640 int (*get_txpower)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3641 int *dbm);
Arik Nemtsova7a6bdd2014-11-09 18:50:19 +02003642
3643 int (*tdls_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3644 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3645 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 oper_class,
3646 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef,
Arik Nemtsov8a4d32f2014-11-09 18:50:20 +02003647 struct sk_buff *tmpl_skb, u32 ch_sw_tm_ie);
Arik Nemtsova7a6bdd2014-11-09 18:50:19 +02003648 void (*tdls_cancel_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3649 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3650 struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
Arik Nemtsov8a4d32f2014-11-09 18:50:20 +02003651 void (*tdls_recv_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3652 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3653 struct ieee80211_tdls_ch_sw_params *params);
Felix Fietkauba8c3d62015-03-27 21:30:37 +01003654
3655 void (*wake_tx_queue)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3656 struct ieee80211_txq *txq);
Sara Sharonf59374e2016-03-02 23:46:14 +02003657 void (*sync_rx_queues)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003658};
3659
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003660/**
Ben Greearad287572014-10-22 12:23:01 -07003661 * ieee80211_alloc_hw_nm - Allocate a new hardware device
3662 *
3663 * This must be called once for each hardware device. The returned pointer
3664 * must be used to refer to this device when calling other functions.
3665 * mac80211 allocates a private data area for the driver pointed to by
3666 * @priv in &struct ieee80211_hw, the size of this area is given as
3667 * @priv_data_len.
3668 *
3669 * @priv_data_len: length of private data
3670 * @ops: callbacks for this device
3671 * @requested_name: Requested name for this device.
3672 * NULL is valid value, and means use the default naming (phy%d)
3673 *
3674 * Return: A pointer to the new hardware device, or %NULL on error.
3675 */
3676struct ieee80211_hw *ieee80211_alloc_hw_nm(size_t priv_data_len,
3677 const struct ieee80211_ops *ops,
3678 const char *requested_name);
3679
3680/**
3681 * ieee80211_alloc_hw - Allocate a new hardware device
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003682 *
3683 * This must be called once for each hardware device. The returned pointer
3684 * must be used to refer to this device when calling other functions.
3685 * mac80211 allocates a private data area for the driver pointed to by
3686 * @priv in &struct ieee80211_hw, the size of this area is given as
3687 * @priv_data_len.
3688 *
3689 * @priv_data_len: length of private data
3690 * @ops: callbacks for this device
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003691 *
3692 * Return: A pointer to the new hardware device, or %NULL on error.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003693 */
Ben Greearad287572014-10-22 12:23:01 -07003694static inline
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003695struct ieee80211_hw *ieee80211_alloc_hw(size_t priv_data_len,
Ben Greearad287572014-10-22 12:23:01 -07003696 const struct ieee80211_ops *ops)
3697{
3698 return ieee80211_alloc_hw_nm(priv_data_len, ops, NULL);
3699}
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003700
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003701/**
3702 * ieee80211_register_hw - Register hardware device
3703 *
Johannes Bergdbbea672008-02-26 14:34:06 +01003704 * You must call this function before any other functions in
3705 * mac80211. Note that before a hardware can be registered, you
3706 * need to fill the contained wiphy's information.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003707 *
3708 * @hw: the device to register as returned by ieee80211_alloc_hw()
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003709 *
3710 * Return: 0 on success. An error code otherwise.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003711 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003712int ieee80211_register_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3713
Johannes Berge1e54062010-11-30 08:58:45 +01003714/**
3715 * struct ieee80211_tpt_blink - throughput blink description
3716 * @throughput: throughput in Kbit/sec
3717 * @blink_time: blink time in milliseconds
3718 * (full cycle, ie. one off + one on period)
3719 */
3720struct ieee80211_tpt_blink {
3721 int throughput;
3722 int blink_time;
3723};
3724
Johannes Berg67408c82010-11-30 08:59:23 +01003725/**
3726 * enum ieee80211_tpt_led_trigger_flags - throughput trigger flags
3727 * @IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_RADIO: enable blinking with radio
3728 * @IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_WORK: enable blinking when working
3729 * @IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_CONNECTED: enable blinking when at least one
3730 * interface is connected in some way, including being an AP
3731 */
3732enum ieee80211_tpt_led_trigger_flags {
3733 IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_RADIO = BIT(0),
3734 IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_WORK = BIT(1),
3735 IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_CONNECTED = BIT(2),
3736};
3737
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003738#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
Johannes Bergf5c4ae02015-04-23 12:09:01 +02003739const char *__ieee80211_get_tx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3740const char *__ieee80211_get_rx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3741const char *__ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3742const char *__ieee80211_get_radio_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3743const char *
3744__ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3745 unsigned int flags,
3746 const struct ieee80211_tpt_blink *blink_table,
3747 unsigned int blink_table_len);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003748#endif
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003749/**
3750 * ieee80211_get_tx_led_name - get name of TX LED
3751 *
3752 * mac80211 creates a transmit LED trigger for each wireless hardware
3753 * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device.
3754 * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs)
3755 * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device.
3756 *
3757 * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003758 *
3759 * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003760 */
Johannes Bergf5c4ae02015-04-23 12:09:01 +02003761static inline const char *ieee80211_get_tx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw)
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003762{
3763#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
3764 return __ieee80211_get_tx_led_name(hw);
3765#else
3766 return NULL;
3767#endif
3768}
3769
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003770/**
3771 * ieee80211_get_rx_led_name - get name of RX LED
3772 *
3773 * mac80211 creates a receive LED trigger for each wireless hardware
3774 * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device.
3775 * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs)
3776 * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device.
3777 *
3778 * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003779 *
3780 * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003781 */
Johannes Bergf5c4ae02015-04-23 12:09:01 +02003782static inline const char *ieee80211_get_rx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw)
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003783{
3784#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
3785 return __ieee80211_get_rx_led_name(hw);
3786#else
3787 return NULL;
3788#endif
3789}
3790
Ivo van Doorncdcb0062008-01-07 19:45:24 +01003791/**
3792 * ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name - get name of association LED
3793 *
3794 * mac80211 creates a association LED trigger for each wireless hardware
3795 * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device.
3796 * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs)
3797 * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device.
3798 *
3799 * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003800 *
3801 * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs.
Ivo van Doorncdcb0062008-01-07 19:45:24 +01003802 */
Johannes Bergf5c4ae02015-04-23 12:09:01 +02003803static inline const char *ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw)
Michael Buesch47f0c502007-09-27 15:10:44 +02003804{
3805#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
3806 return __ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name(hw);
3807#else
3808 return NULL;
3809#endif
3810}
3811
Ivo van Doorncdcb0062008-01-07 19:45:24 +01003812/**
3813 * ieee80211_get_radio_led_name - get name of radio LED
3814 *
3815 * mac80211 creates a radio change LED trigger for each wireless hardware
3816 * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device.
3817 * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs)
3818 * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device.
3819 *
3820 * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003821 *
3822 * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs.
Ivo van Doorncdcb0062008-01-07 19:45:24 +01003823 */
Johannes Bergf5c4ae02015-04-23 12:09:01 +02003824static inline const char *ieee80211_get_radio_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw)
Ivo van Doorncdcb0062008-01-07 19:45:24 +01003825{
3826#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
3827 return __ieee80211_get_radio_led_name(hw);
3828#else
3829 return NULL;
3830#endif
3831}
Michael Buesch47f0c502007-09-27 15:10:44 +02003832
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003833/**
Johannes Berge1e54062010-11-30 08:58:45 +01003834 * ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger - create throughput LED trigger
3835 * @hw: the hardware to create the trigger for
Johannes Berg67408c82010-11-30 08:59:23 +01003836 * @flags: trigger flags, see &enum ieee80211_tpt_led_trigger_flags
Johannes Berge1e54062010-11-30 08:58:45 +01003837 * @blink_table: the blink table -- needs to be ordered by throughput
3838 * @blink_table_len: size of the blink table
3839 *
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003840 * Return: %NULL (in case of error, or if no LED triggers are
3841 * configured) or the name of the new trigger.
3842 *
3843 * Note: This function must be called before ieee80211_register_hw().
Johannes Berge1e54062010-11-30 08:58:45 +01003844 */
Johannes Bergf5c4ae02015-04-23 12:09:01 +02003845static inline const char *
Johannes Berg67408c82010-11-30 08:59:23 +01003846ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, unsigned int flags,
Johannes Berge1e54062010-11-30 08:58:45 +01003847 const struct ieee80211_tpt_blink *blink_table,
3848 unsigned int blink_table_len)
3849{
3850#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
Johannes Berg67408c82010-11-30 08:59:23 +01003851 return __ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger(hw, flags, blink_table,
Johannes Berge1e54062010-11-30 08:58:45 +01003852 blink_table_len);
3853#else
3854 return NULL;
3855#endif
3856}
3857
3858/**
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003859 * ieee80211_unregister_hw - Unregister a hardware device
3860 *
3861 * This function instructs mac80211 to free allocated resources
3862 * and unregister netdevices from the networking subsystem.
3863 *
3864 * @hw: the hardware to unregister
3865 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003866void ieee80211_unregister_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3867
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003868/**
3869 * ieee80211_free_hw - free hardware descriptor
3870 *
3871 * This function frees everything that was allocated, including the
3872 * private data for the driver. You must call ieee80211_unregister_hw()
Randy Dunlap6ef307b2008-07-03 13:52:18 -07003873 * before calling this function.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003874 *
3875 * @hw: the hardware to free
3876 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003877void ieee80211_free_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3878
Johannes Bergf2753dd2009-04-14 10:09:24 +02003879/**
3880 * ieee80211_restart_hw - restart hardware completely
3881 *
3882 * Call this function when the hardware was restarted for some reason
3883 * (hardware error, ...) and the driver is unable to restore its state
3884 * by itself. mac80211 assumes that at this point the driver/hardware
3885 * is completely uninitialised and stopped, it starts the process by
3886 * calling the ->start() operation. The driver will need to reset all
3887 * internal state that it has prior to calling this function.
3888 *
3889 * @hw: the hardware to restart
3890 */
3891void ieee80211_restart_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3892
Johannes Berg06d181a2014-02-04 20:51:09 +01003893/**
Johannes Bergaf9f9b22015-06-11 16:02:32 +02003894 * ieee80211_rx_napi - receive frame from NAPI context
John W. Linville4e6cbfd2010-07-29 16:14:13 -04003895 *
Johannes Bergaf9f9b22015-06-11 16:02:32 +02003896 * Use this function to hand received frames to mac80211. The receive
3897 * buffer in @skb must start with an IEEE 802.11 header. In case of a
3898 * paged @skb is used, the driver is recommended to put the ieee80211
3899 * header of the frame on the linear part of the @skb to avoid memory
3900 * allocation and/or memcpy by the stack.
3901 *
3902 * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function
3903 * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other. Calls to
3904 * this function, ieee80211_rx_ni() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() may not be
3905 * mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with
3906 * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni().
3907 *
3908 * This function must be called with BHs disabled.
3909 *
3910 * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on
Johannes Bergd63b5482016-03-31 20:02:02 +03003911 * @sta: the station the frame was received from, or %NULL
Johannes Bergaf9f9b22015-06-11 16:02:32 +02003912 * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call
3913 * @napi: the NAPI context
John W. Linville4e6cbfd2010-07-29 16:14:13 -04003914 */
Johannes Bergd63b5482016-03-31 20:02:02 +03003915void ieee80211_rx_napi(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3916 struct sk_buff *skb, struct napi_struct *napi);
John W. Linville4e6cbfd2010-07-29 16:14:13 -04003917
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003918/**
3919 * ieee80211_rx - receive frame
3920 *
3921 * Use this function to hand received frames to mac80211. The receive
Zhu Yie3cf8b32010-03-29 17:35:07 +08003922 * buffer in @skb must start with an IEEE 802.11 header. In case of a
3923 * paged @skb is used, the driver is recommended to put the ieee80211
3924 * header of the frame on the linear part of the @skb to avoid memory
3925 * allocation and/or memcpy by the stack.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003926 *
Johannes Berg2485f712008-02-25 16:27:41 +01003927 * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function
Kalle Valoe36e49f2009-10-13 20:33:13 +03003928 * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other. Calls to
3929 * this function, ieee80211_rx_ni() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() may not be
Felix Fietkauf6b3d852013-05-03 10:01:03 +02003930 * mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with
3931 * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni().
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003932 *
Kalle Valoe36e49f2009-10-13 20:33:13 +03003933 * In process context use instead ieee80211_rx_ni().
Johannes Bergd20ef632009-10-11 15:10:40 +02003934 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003935 * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on
3936 * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003937 */
Johannes Bergaf9f9b22015-06-11 16:02:32 +02003938static inline void ieee80211_rx(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb)
3939{
Johannes Bergd63b5482016-03-31 20:02:02 +03003940 ieee80211_rx_napi(hw, NULL, skb, NULL);
Johannes Bergaf9f9b22015-06-11 16:02:32 +02003941}
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003942
3943/**
3944 * ieee80211_rx_irqsafe - receive frame
3945 *
3946 * Like ieee80211_rx() but can be called in IRQ context
Johannes Berg2485f712008-02-25 16:27:41 +01003947 * (internally defers to a tasklet.)
3948 *
Kalle Valoe36e49f2009-10-13 20:33:13 +03003949 * Calls to this function, ieee80211_rx() or ieee80211_rx_ni() may not
Felix Fietkauf6b3d852013-05-03 10:01:03 +02003950 * be mixed for a single hardware.Must not run concurrently with
3951 * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni().
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003952 *
3953 * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on
3954 * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003955 */
Johannes Bergf1d58c22009-06-17 13:13:00 +02003956void ieee80211_rx_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003957
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003958/**
Kalle Valoe36e49f2009-10-13 20:33:13 +03003959 * ieee80211_rx_ni - receive frame (in process context)
3960 *
3961 * Like ieee80211_rx() but can be called in process context
3962 * (internally disables bottom halves).
3963 *
3964 * Calls to this function, ieee80211_rx() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() may
Felix Fietkauf6b3d852013-05-03 10:01:03 +02003965 * not be mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with
3966 * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni().
Kalle Valoe36e49f2009-10-13 20:33:13 +03003967 *
3968 * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on
3969 * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call
3970 */
3971static inline void ieee80211_rx_ni(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3972 struct sk_buff *skb)
3973{
3974 local_bh_disable();
3975 ieee80211_rx(hw, skb);
3976 local_bh_enable();
3977}
3978
Arik Nemtsovd057e5a2011-01-31 22:29:13 +02003979/**
3980 * ieee80211_sta_ps_transition - PS transition for connected sta
3981 *
3982 * When operating in AP mode with the %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS
3983 * flag set, use this function to inform mac80211 about a connected station
3984 * entering/leaving PS mode.
3985 *
3986 * This function may not be called in IRQ context or with softirqs enabled.
3987 *
3988 * Calls to this function for a single hardware must be synchronized against
3989 * each other.
3990 *
Arik Nemtsovd057e5a2011-01-31 22:29:13 +02003991 * @sta: currently connected sta
3992 * @start: start or stop PS
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003993 *
3994 * Return: 0 on success. -EINVAL when the requested PS mode is already set.
Arik Nemtsovd057e5a2011-01-31 22:29:13 +02003995 */
3996int ieee80211_sta_ps_transition(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, bool start);
3997
3998/**
3999 * ieee80211_sta_ps_transition_ni - PS transition for connected sta
4000 * (in process context)
4001 *
4002 * Like ieee80211_sta_ps_transition() but can be called in process context
4003 * (internally disables bottom halves). Concurrent call restriction still
4004 * applies.
4005 *
4006 * @sta: currently connected sta
4007 * @start: start or stop PS
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004008 *
4009 * Return: Like ieee80211_sta_ps_transition().
Arik Nemtsovd057e5a2011-01-31 22:29:13 +02004010 */
4011static inline int ieee80211_sta_ps_transition_ni(struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4012 bool start)
4013{
4014 int ret;
4015
4016 local_bh_disable();
4017 ret = ieee80211_sta_ps_transition(sta, start);
4018 local_bh_enable();
4019
4020 return ret;
4021}
4022
Johannes Berg46fa38e2016-05-03 16:58:00 +03004023/**
4024 * ieee80211_sta_pspoll - PS-Poll frame received
4025 * @sta: currently connected station
4026 *
4027 * When operating in AP mode with the %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS flag set,
4028 * use this function to inform mac80211 that a PS-Poll frame from a
4029 * connected station was received.
4030 * This must be used in conjunction with ieee80211_sta_ps_transition()
4031 * and possibly ieee80211_sta_uapsd_trigger(); calls to all three must
4032 * be serialized.
4033 */
4034void ieee80211_sta_pspoll(struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
4035
4036/**
4037 * ieee80211_sta_uapsd_trigger - (potential) U-APSD trigger frame received
4038 * @sta: currently connected station
4039 * @tid: TID of the received (potential) trigger frame
4040 *
4041 * When operating in AP mode with the %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS flag set,
4042 * use this function to inform mac80211 that a (potential) trigger frame
4043 * from a connected station was received.
4044 * This must be used in conjunction with ieee80211_sta_ps_transition()
4045 * and possibly ieee80211_sta_pspoll(); calls to all three must be
4046 * serialized.
4047 */
4048void ieee80211_sta_uapsd_trigger(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 tid);
4049
Gertjan van Wingerded24deb22009-12-04 23:46:54 +01004050/*
4051 * The TX headroom reserved by mac80211 for its own tx_status functions.
4052 * This is enough for the radiotap header.
4053 */
Helmut Schaa7f2a5e22011-10-11 18:08:55 +02004054#define IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_HEADROOM 14
Gertjan van Wingerded24deb22009-12-04 23:46:54 +01004055
Kalle Valoe36e49f2009-10-13 20:33:13 +03004056/**
Johannes Berg042ec452011-09-29 16:04:26 +02004057 * ieee80211_sta_set_buffered - inform mac80211 about driver-buffered frames
Randy Dunlapbdfbe802011-05-22 17:22:45 -07004058 * @sta: &struct ieee80211_sta pointer for the sleeping station
Johannes Berg042ec452011-09-29 16:04:26 +02004059 * @tid: the TID that has buffered frames
4060 * @buffered: indicates whether or not frames are buffered for this TID
Felix Fietkaudcf55fb2011-04-17 17:45:00 +02004061 *
4062 * If a driver buffers frames for a powersave station instead of passing
Johannes Berg042ec452011-09-29 16:04:26 +02004063 * them back to mac80211 for retransmission, the station may still need
4064 * to be told that there are buffered frames via the TIM bit.
Felix Fietkaudcf55fb2011-04-17 17:45:00 +02004065 *
Johannes Berg042ec452011-09-29 16:04:26 +02004066 * This function informs mac80211 whether or not there are frames that are
4067 * buffered in the driver for a given TID; mac80211 can then use this data
4068 * to set the TIM bit (NOTE: This may call back into the driver's set_tim
4069 * call! Beware of the locking!)
4070 *
4071 * If all frames are released to the station (due to PS-poll or uAPSD)
4072 * then the driver needs to inform mac80211 that there no longer are
4073 * frames buffered. However, when the station wakes up mac80211 assumes
4074 * that all buffered frames will be transmitted and clears this data,
4075 * drivers need to make sure they inform mac80211 about all buffered
4076 * frames on the sleep transition (sta_notify() with %STA_NOTIFY_SLEEP).
4077 *
4078 * Note that technically mac80211 only needs to know this per AC, not per
4079 * TID, but since driver buffering will inevitably happen per TID (since
4080 * it is related to aggregation) it is easier to make mac80211 map the
4081 * TID to the AC as required instead of keeping track in all drivers that
4082 * use this API.
Felix Fietkaudcf55fb2011-04-17 17:45:00 +02004083 */
Johannes Berg042ec452011-09-29 16:04:26 +02004084void ieee80211_sta_set_buffered(struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4085 u8 tid, bool buffered);
Felix Fietkaudcf55fb2011-04-17 17:45:00 +02004086
4087/**
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +02004088 * ieee80211_get_tx_rates - get the selected transmit rates for a packet
4089 *
4090 * Call this function in a driver with per-packet rate selection support
4091 * to combine the rate info in the packet tx info with the most recent
4092 * rate selection table for the station entry.
4093 *
4094 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4095 * @sta: the receiver station to which this packet is sent.
4096 * @skb: the frame to be transmitted.
4097 * @dest: buffer for extracted rate/retry information
4098 * @max_rates: maximum number of rates to fetch
4099 */
4100void ieee80211_get_tx_rates(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4101 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4102 struct sk_buff *skb,
4103 struct ieee80211_tx_rate *dest,
4104 int max_rates);
4105
4106/**
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04004107 * ieee80211_tx_status - transmit status callback
4108 *
4109 * Call this function for all transmitted frames after they have been
4110 * transmitted. It is permissible to not call this function for
4111 * multicast frames but this can affect statistics.
4112 *
Johannes Berg2485f712008-02-25 16:27:41 +01004113 * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function
4114 * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other. Calls
Johannes Stezenbach20ed3162010-11-30 16:49:23 +01004115 * to this function, ieee80211_tx_status_ni() and ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe()
Felix Fietkauf6b3d852013-05-03 10:01:03 +02004116 * may not be mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with
4117 * ieee80211_rx() or ieee80211_rx_ni().
Johannes Berg2485f712008-02-25 16:27:41 +01004118 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04004119 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
4120 * @skb: the frame that was transmitted, owned by mac80211 after this call
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04004121 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004122void ieee80211_tx_status(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02004123 struct sk_buff *skb);
Johannes Berg2485f712008-02-25 16:27:41 +01004124
4125/**
Felix Fietkauf027c2a2014-11-19 20:08:13 +01004126 * ieee80211_tx_status_noskb - transmit status callback without skb
4127 *
4128 * This function can be used as a replacement for ieee80211_tx_status
4129 * in drivers that cannot reliably map tx status information back to
4130 * specific skbs.
4131 *
4132 * Calls to this function for a single hardware must be synchronized
4133 * against each other. Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status_ni()
4134 * and ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() may not be mixed for a single hardware.
4135 *
4136 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
4137 * @sta: the receiver station to which this packet is sent
4138 * (NULL for multicast packets)
4139 * @info: tx status information
4140 */
4141void ieee80211_tx_status_noskb(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4142 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4143 struct ieee80211_tx_info *info);
4144
4145/**
Johannes Stezenbach20ed3162010-11-30 16:49:23 +01004146 * ieee80211_tx_status_ni - transmit status callback (in process context)
4147 *
4148 * Like ieee80211_tx_status() but can be called in process context.
4149 *
4150 * Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status() and
4151 * ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() may not be mixed
4152 * for a single hardware.
4153 *
4154 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
4155 * @skb: the frame that was transmitted, owned by mac80211 after this call
4156 */
4157static inline void ieee80211_tx_status_ni(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4158 struct sk_buff *skb)
4159{
4160 local_bh_disable();
4161 ieee80211_tx_status(hw, skb);
4162 local_bh_enable();
4163}
4164
4165/**
Randy Dunlap6ef307b2008-07-03 13:52:18 -07004166 * ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe - IRQ-safe transmit status callback
Johannes Berg2485f712008-02-25 16:27:41 +01004167 *
4168 * Like ieee80211_tx_status() but can be called in IRQ context
4169 * (internally defers to a tasklet.)
4170 *
Johannes Stezenbach20ed3162010-11-30 16:49:23 +01004171 * Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status() and
4172 * ieee80211_tx_status_ni() may not be mixed for a single hardware.
Johannes Berg2485f712008-02-25 16:27:41 +01004173 *
4174 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
4175 * @skb: the frame that was transmitted, owned by mac80211 after this call
Johannes Berg2485f712008-02-25 16:27:41 +01004176 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004177void ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02004178 struct sk_buff *skb);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004179
4180/**
Arik Nemtsov8178d382011-04-18 14:22:28 +03004181 * ieee80211_report_low_ack - report non-responding station
4182 *
4183 * When operating in AP-mode, call this function to report a non-responding
4184 * connected STA.
4185 *
4186 * @sta: the non-responding connected sta
4187 * @num_packets: number of packets sent to @sta without a response
4188 */
4189void ieee80211_report_low_ack(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u32 num_packets);
4190
Andrei Otcheretianski1af586c2014-05-09 14:11:50 +03004191#define IEEE80211_MAX_CSA_COUNTERS_NUM 2
4192
Arik Nemtsov8178d382011-04-18 14:22:28 +03004193/**
Andrei Otcheretianski6ec8c332014-05-09 14:11:49 +03004194 * struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets - mutable beacon offsets
4195 * @tim_offset: position of TIM element
4196 * @tim_length: size of TIM element
Luciano Coelho8d77ec82014-05-15 20:32:08 +03004197 * @csa_counter_offs: array of IEEE80211_MAX_CSA_COUNTERS_NUM offsets
4198 * to CSA counters. This array can contain zero values which
4199 * should be ignored.
Andrei Otcheretianski6ec8c332014-05-09 14:11:49 +03004200 */
4201struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets {
4202 u16 tim_offset;
4203 u16 tim_length;
Andrei Otcheretianski1af586c2014-05-09 14:11:50 +03004204
4205 u16 csa_counter_offs[IEEE80211_MAX_CSA_COUNTERS_NUM];
Andrei Otcheretianski6ec8c332014-05-09 14:11:49 +03004206};
4207
4208/**
4209 * ieee80211_beacon_get_template - beacon template generation function
4210 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4211 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4212 * @offs: &struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets pointer to struct that will
4213 * receive the offsets that may be updated by the driver.
4214 *
4215 * If the driver implements beaconing modes, it must use this function to
4216 * obtain the beacon template.
4217 *
4218 * This function should be used if the beacon frames are generated by the
4219 * device, and then the driver must use the returned beacon as the template
Andrei Otcheretianski1af586c2014-05-09 14:11:50 +03004220 * The driver or the device are responsible to update the DTIM and, when
4221 * applicable, the CSA count.
Andrei Otcheretianski6ec8c332014-05-09 14:11:49 +03004222 *
4223 * The driver is responsible for freeing the returned skb.
4224 *
4225 * Return: The beacon template. %NULL on error.
4226 */
4227struct sk_buff *
4228ieee80211_beacon_get_template(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4229 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4230 struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets *offs);
4231
4232/**
Johannes Bergeddcbb92009-10-29 08:30:35 +01004233 * ieee80211_beacon_get_tim - beacon generation function
4234 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01004235 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Johannes Bergeddcbb92009-10-29 08:30:35 +01004236 * @tim_offset: pointer to variable that will receive the TIM IE offset.
4237 * Set to 0 if invalid (in non-AP modes).
4238 * @tim_length: pointer to variable that will receive the TIM IE length,
4239 * (including the ID and length bytes!).
4240 * Set to 0 if invalid (in non-AP modes).
4241 *
4242 * If the driver implements beaconing modes, it must use this function to
Andrei Otcheretianski6ec8c332014-05-09 14:11:49 +03004243 * obtain the beacon frame.
Johannes Bergeddcbb92009-10-29 08:30:35 +01004244 *
4245 * If the beacon frames are generated by the host system (i.e., not in
4246 * hardware/firmware), the driver uses this function to get each beacon
Andrei Otcheretianski6ec8c332014-05-09 14:11:49 +03004247 * frame from mac80211 -- it is responsible for calling this function exactly
4248 * once before the beacon is needed (e.g. based on hardware interrupt).
Johannes Bergeddcbb92009-10-29 08:30:35 +01004249 *
4250 * The driver is responsible for freeing the returned skb.
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004251 *
4252 * Return: The beacon template. %NULL on error.
Johannes Bergeddcbb92009-10-29 08:30:35 +01004253 */
4254struct sk_buff *ieee80211_beacon_get_tim(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4255 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4256 u16 *tim_offset, u16 *tim_length);
4257
4258/**
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004259 * ieee80211_beacon_get - beacon generation function
4260 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01004261 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004262 *
Johannes Bergeddcbb92009-10-29 08:30:35 +01004263 * See ieee80211_beacon_get_tim().
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004264 *
4265 * Return: See ieee80211_beacon_get_tim().
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004266 */
Johannes Bergeddcbb92009-10-29 08:30:35 +01004267static inline struct sk_buff *ieee80211_beacon_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4268 struct ieee80211_vif *vif)
4269{
4270 return ieee80211_beacon_get_tim(hw, vif, NULL, NULL);
4271}
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004272
4273/**
Andrei Otcheretianski1af586c2014-05-09 14:11:50 +03004274 * ieee80211_csa_update_counter - request mac80211 to decrement the csa counter
4275 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4276 *
4277 * The csa counter should be updated after each beacon transmission.
4278 * This function is called implicitly when
4279 * ieee80211_beacon_get/ieee80211_beacon_get_tim are called, however if the
4280 * beacon frames are generated by the device, the driver should call this
4281 * function after each beacon transmission to sync mac80211's csa counters.
4282 *
4283 * Return: new csa counter value
4284 */
4285u8 ieee80211_csa_update_counter(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4286
4287/**
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +02004288 * ieee80211_csa_finish - notify mac80211 about channel switch
4289 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4290 *
4291 * After a channel switch announcement was scheduled and the counter in this
Luciano Coelho66e01cf2014-01-13 19:43:00 +02004292 * announcement hits 1, this function must be called by the driver to
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +02004293 * notify mac80211 that the channel can be changed.
4294 */
4295void ieee80211_csa_finish(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4296
4297/**
Luciano Coelho66e01cf2014-01-13 19:43:00 +02004298 * ieee80211_csa_is_complete - find out if counters reached 1
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +02004299 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4300 *
4301 * This function returns whether the channel switch counters reached zero.
4302 */
4303bool ieee80211_csa_is_complete(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4304
4305
4306/**
Arik Nemtsov02945822011-11-10 11:28:57 +02004307 * ieee80211_proberesp_get - retrieve a Probe Response template
4308 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4309 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4310 *
4311 * Creates a Probe Response template which can, for example, be uploaded to
4312 * hardware. The destination address should be set by the caller.
4313 *
4314 * Can only be called in AP mode.
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004315 *
4316 * Return: The Probe Response template. %NULL on error.
Arik Nemtsov02945822011-11-10 11:28:57 +02004317 */
4318struct sk_buff *ieee80211_proberesp_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4319 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4320
4321/**
Kalle Valo7044cc52010-01-05 20:16:19 +02004322 * ieee80211_pspoll_get - retrieve a PS Poll template
4323 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4324 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4325 *
4326 * Creates a PS Poll a template which can, for example, uploaded to
4327 * hardware. The template must be updated after association so that correct
4328 * AID, BSSID and MAC address is used.
4329 *
4330 * Note: Caller (or hardware) is responsible for setting the
4331 * &IEEE80211_FCTL_PM bit.
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004332 *
4333 * Return: The PS Poll template. %NULL on error.
Kalle Valo7044cc52010-01-05 20:16:19 +02004334 */
4335struct sk_buff *ieee80211_pspoll_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4336 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4337
4338/**
4339 * ieee80211_nullfunc_get - retrieve a nullfunc template
4340 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4341 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4342 *
4343 * Creates a Nullfunc template which can, for example, uploaded to
4344 * hardware. The template must be updated after association so that correct
4345 * BSSID and address is used.
4346 *
4347 * Note: Caller (or hardware) is responsible for setting the
4348 * &IEEE80211_FCTL_PM bit as well as Duration and Sequence Control fields.
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004349 *
4350 * Return: The nullfunc template. %NULL on error.
Kalle Valo7044cc52010-01-05 20:16:19 +02004351 */
4352struct sk_buff *ieee80211_nullfunc_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4353 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4354
4355/**
Kalle Valo05e54ea2010-01-05 20:16:38 +02004356 * ieee80211_probereq_get - retrieve a Probe Request template
4357 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
Johannes Berga344d672014-06-12 22:24:31 +02004358 * @src_addr: source MAC address
Kalle Valo05e54ea2010-01-05 20:16:38 +02004359 * @ssid: SSID buffer
4360 * @ssid_len: length of SSID
Johannes Bergb9a9ada2012-11-29 13:00:10 +01004361 * @tailroom: tailroom to reserve at end of SKB for IEs
Kalle Valo05e54ea2010-01-05 20:16:38 +02004362 *
4363 * Creates a Probe Request template which can, for example, be uploaded to
4364 * hardware.
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004365 *
4366 * Return: The Probe Request template. %NULL on error.
Kalle Valo05e54ea2010-01-05 20:16:38 +02004367 */
4368struct sk_buff *ieee80211_probereq_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berga344d672014-06-12 22:24:31 +02004369 const u8 *src_addr,
Kalle Valo05e54ea2010-01-05 20:16:38 +02004370 const u8 *ssid, size_t ssid_len,
Johannes Bergb9a9ada2012-11-29 13:00:10 +01004371 size_t tailroom);
Kalle Valo05e54ea2010-01-05 20:16:38 +02004372
4373/**
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004374 * ieee80211_rts_get - RTS frame generation function
4375 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01004376 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004377 * @frame: pointer to the frame that is going to be protected by the RTS.
4378 * @frame_len: the frame length (in octets).
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02004379 * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004380 * @rts: The buffer where to store the RTS frame.
4381 *
4382 * If the RTS frames are generated by the host system (i.e., not in
4383 * hardware/firmware), the low-level driver uses this function to receive
4384 * the next RTS frame from the 802.11 code. The low-level is responsible
4385 * for calling this function before and RTS frame is needed.
4386 */
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01004387void ieee80211_rts_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004388 const void *frame, size_t frame_len,
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02004389 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl,
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004390 struct ieee80211_rts *rts);
4391
4392/**
4393 * ieee80211_rts_duration - Get the duration field for an RTS frame
4394 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01004395 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004396 * @frame_len: the length of the frame that is going to be protected by the RTS.
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02004397 * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004398 *
4399 * If the RTS is generated in firmware, but the host system must provide
4400 * the duration field, the low-level driver uses this function to receive
4401 * the duration field value in little-endian byteorder.
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004402 *
4403 * Return: The duration.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004404 */
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01004405__le16 ieee80211_rts_duration(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4406 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, size_t frame_len,
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02004407 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004408
4409/**
4410 * ieee80211_ctstoself_get - CTS-to-self frame generation function
4411 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01004412 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004413 * @frame: pointer to the frame that is going to be protected by the CTS-to-self.
4414 * @frame_len: the frame length (in octets).
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02004415 * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004416 * @cts: The buffer where to store the CTS-to-self frame.
4417 *
4418 * If the CTS-to-self frames are generated by the host system (i.e., not in
4419 * hardware/firmware), the low-level driver uses this function to receive
4420 * the next CTS-to-self frame from the 802.11 code. The low-level is responsible
4421 * for calling this function before and CTS-to-self frame is needed.
4422 */
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01004423void ieee80211_ctstoself_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4424 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004425 const void *frame, size_t frame_len,
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02004426 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl,
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004427 struct ieee80211_cts *cts);
4428
4429/**
4430 * ieee80211_ctstoself_duration - Get the duration field for a CTS-to-self frame
4431 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01004432 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004433 * @frame_len: the length of the frame that is going to be protected by the CTS-to-self.
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02004434 * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004435 *
4436 * If the CTS-to-self is generated in firmware, but the host system must provide
4437 * the duration field, the low-level driver uses this function to receive
4438 * the duration field value in little-endian byteorder.
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004439 *
4440 * Return: The duration.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004441 */
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01004442__le16 ieee80211_ctstoself_duration(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4443 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004444 size_t frame_len,
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02004445 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004446
4447/**
4448 * ieee80211_generic_frame_duration - Calculate the duration field for a frame
4449 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01004450 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Johannes Bergd13e1412012-06-09 10:31:09 +02004451 * @band: the band to calculate the frame duration on
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004452 * @frame_len: the length of the frame.
Johannes Berg8318d782008-01-24 19:38:38 +01004453 * @rate: the rate at which the frame is going to be transmitted.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004454 *
4455 * Calculate the duration field of some generic frame, given its
4456 * length and transmission rate (in 100kbps).
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004457 *
4458 * Return: The duration.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004459 */
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01004460__le16 ieee80211_generic_frame_duration(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4461 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Johannes Berg57fbcce2016-04-12 15:56:15 +02004462 enum nl80211_band band,
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004463 size_t frame_len,
Johannes Berg8318d782008-01-24 19:38:38 +01004464 struct ieee80211_rate *rate);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004465
4466/**
4467 * ieee80211_get_buffered_bc - accessing buffered broadcast and multicast frames
4468 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01004469 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004470 *
4471 * Function for accessing buffered broadcast and multicast frames. If
4472 * hardware/firmware does not implement buffering of broadcast/multicast
4473 * frames when power saving is used, 802.11 code buffers them in the host
4474 * memory. The low-level driver uses this function to fetch next buffered
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004475 * frame. In most cases, this is used when generating beacon frame.
4476 *
4477 * Return: A pointer to the next buffered skb or NULL if no more buffered
4478 * frames are available.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004479 *
4480 * Note: buffered frames are returned only after DTIM beacon frame was
4481 * generated with ieee80211_beacon_get() and the low-level driver must thus
4482 * call ieee80211_beacon_get() first. ieee80211_get_buffered_bc() returns
4483 * NULL if the previous generated beacon was not DTIM, so the low-level driver
4484 * does not need to check for DTIM beacons separately and should be able to
4485 * use common code for all beacons.
4486 */
4487struct sk_buff *
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02004488ieee80211_get_buffered_bc(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004489
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04004490/**
Johannes Berg42d98792011-07-07 18:58:01 +02004491 * ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k_iv - get a TKIP phase 1 key for IV32
4492 *
4493 * This function returns the TKIP phase 1 key for the given IV32.
4494 *
4495 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
4496 * @iv32: IV32 to get the P1K for
4497 * @p1k: a buffer to which the key will be written, as 5 u16 values
4498 */
4499void ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k_iv(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
4500 u32 iv32, u16 *p1k);
4501
4502/**
Johannes Berg523b02e2011-07-07 22:28:01 +02004503 * ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k - get a TKIP phase 1 key
Emmanuel Grumbach5d2cdcd2008-03-20 15:06:41 +02004504 *
Johannes Berg523b02e2011-07-07 22:28:01 +02004505 * This function returns the TKIP phase 1 key for the IV32 taken
4506 * from the given packet.
Emmanuel Grumbach5d2cdcd2008-03-20 15:06:41 +02004507 *
4508 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
Johannes Berg523b02e2011-07-07 22:28:01 +02004509 * @skb: the packet to take the IV32 value from that will be encrypted
4510 * with this P1K
4511 * @p1k: a buffer to which the key will be written, as 5 u16 values
Emmanuel Grumbach5d2cdcd2008-03-20 15:06:41 +02004512 */
Johannes Berg42d98792011-07-07 18:58:01 +02004513static inline void ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
4514 struct sk_buff *skb, u16 *p1k)
4515{
4516 struct ieee80211_hdr *hdr = (struct ieee80211_hdr *)skb->data;
4517 const u8 *data = (u8 *)hdr + ieee80211_hdrlen(hdr->frame_control);
4518 u32 iv32 = get_unaligned_le32(&data[4]);
4519
4520 ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k_iv(keyconf, iv32, p1k);
4521}
Johannes Berg523b02e2011-07-07 22:28:01 +02004522
4523/**
Johannes Berg8bca5d82011-07-13 19:50:34 +02004524 * ieee80211_get_tkip_rx_p1k - get a TKIP phase 1 key for RX
4525 *
4526 * This function returns the TKIP phase 1 key for the given IV32
4527 * and transmitter address.
4528 *
4529 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
4530 * @ta: TA that will be used with the key
4531 * @iv32: IV32 to get the P1K for
4532 * @p1k: a buffer to which the key will be written, as 5 u16 values
4533 */
4534void ieee80211_get_tkip_rx_p1k(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
4535 const u8 *ta, u32 iv32, u16 *p1k);
4536
4537/**
Johannes Berg523b02e2011-07-07 22:28:01 +02004538 * ieee80211_get_tkip_p2k - get a TKIP phase 2 key
4539 *
4540 * This function computes the TKIP RC4 key for the IV values
4541 * in the packet.
4542 *
4543 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
4544 * @skb: the packet to take the IV32/IV16 values from that will be
4545 * encrypted with this key
4546 * @p2k: a buffer to which the key will be written, 16 bytes
4547 */
4548void ieee80211_get_tkip_p2k(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
4549 struct sk_buff *skb, u8 *p2k);
Johannes Bergc68f4b82011-07-05 16:35:41 +02004550
4551/**
Eliad Pellerf8079d42016-02-14 13:56:35 +02004552 * ieee80211_tkip_add_iv - write TKIP IV and Ext. IV to pos
4553 *
4554 * @pos: start of crypto header
4555 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
4556 * @pn: PN to add
4557 *
4558 * Returns: pointer to the octet following IVs (i.e. beginning of
4559 * the packet payload)
4560 *
4561 * This function writes the tkip IV value to pos (which should
4562 * point to the crypto header)
4563 */
4564u8 *ieee80211_tkip_add_iv(u8 *pos, struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf, u64 pn);
4565
4566/**
Johannes Berg3ea542d2011-07-07 18:58:00 +02004567 * ieee80211_get_key_rx_seq - get key RX sequence counter
4568 *
4569 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
Jouni Malinen00b9cfa2015-01-24 19:52:06 +02004570 * @tid: The TID, or -1 for the management frame value (CCMP/GCMP only);
Johannes Berg3ea542d2011-07-07 18:58:00 +02004571 * the value on TID 0 is also used for non-QoS frames. For
4572 * CMAC, only TID 0 is valid.
4573 * @seq: buffer to receive the sequence data
4574 *
4575 * This function allows a driver to retrieve the current RX IV/PNs
4576 * for the given key. It must not be called if IV checking is done
4577 * by the device and not by mac80211.
4578 *
4579 * Note that this function may only be called when no RX processing
4580 * can be done concurrently.
4581 */
4582void ieee80211_get_key_rx_seq(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
4583 int tid, struct ieee80211_key_seq *seq);
4584
4585/**
Johannes Berg27b3eb92013-08-07 20:11:55 +02004586 * ieee80211_set_key_rx_seq - set key RX sequence counter
4587 *
4588 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
Jouni Malinen00b9cfa2015-01-24 19:52:06 +02004589 * @tid: The TID, or -1 for the management frame value (CCMP/GCMP only);
Johannes Berg27b3eb92013-08-07 20:11:55 +02004590 * the value on TID 0 is also used for non-QoS frames. For
4591 * CMAC, only TID 0 is valid.
4592 * @seq: new sequence data
4593 *
4594 * This function allows a driver to set the current RX IV/PNs for the
4595 * given key. This is useful when resuming from WoWLAN sleep and GTK
4596 * rekey may have been done while suspended. It should not be called
4597 * if IV checking is done by the device and not by mac80211.
4598 *
4599 * Note that this function may only be called when no RX processing
4600 * can be done concurrently.
4601 */
4602void ieee80211_set_key_rx_seq(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
4603 int tid, struct ieee80211_key_seq *seq);
4604
4605/**
4606 * ieee80211_remove_key - remove the given key
4607 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
4608 *
4609 * Remove the given key. If the key was uploaded to the hardware at the
4610 * time this function is called, it is not deleted in the hardware but
4611 * instead assumed to have been removed already.
4612 *
4613 * Note that due to locking considerations this function can (currently)
4614 * only be called during key iteration (ieee80211_iter_keys().)
4615 */
4616void ieee80211_remove_key(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf);
4617
4618/**
4619 * ieee80211_gtk_rekey_add - add a GTK key from rekeying during WoWLAN
4620 * @vif: the virtual interface to add the key on
4621 * @keyconf: new key data
4622 *
4623 * When GTK rekeying was done while the system was suspended, (a) new
4624 * key(s) will be available. These will be needed by mac80211 for proper
4625 * RX processing, so this function allows setting them.
4626 *
4627 * The function returns the newly allocated key structure, which will
4628 * have similar contents to the passed key configuration but point to
4629 * mac80211-owned memory. In case of errors, the function returns an
4630 * ERR_PTR(), use IS_ERR() etc.
4631 *
4632 * Note that this function assumes the key isn't added to hardware
4633 * acceleration, so no TX will be done with the key. Since it's a GTK
4634 * on managed (station) networks, this is true anyway. If the driver
4635 * calls this function from the resume callback and subsequently uses
4636 * the return code 1 to reconfigure the device, this key will be part
4637 * of the reconfiguration.
4638 *
4639 * Note that the driver should also call ieee80211_set_key_rx_seq()
4640 * for the new key for each TID to set up sequence counters properly.
4641 *
4642 * IMPORTANT: If this replaces a key that is present in the hardware,
4643 * then it will attempt to remove it during this call. In many cases
4644 * this isn't what you want, so call ieee80211_remove_key() first for
4645 * the key that's being replaced.
4646 */
4647struct ieee80211_key_conf *
4648ieee80211_gtk_rekey_add(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4649 struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf);
4650
4651/**
Johannes Bergc68f4b82011-07-05 16:35:41 +02004652 * ieee80211_gtk_rekey_notify - notify userspace supplicant of rekeying
4653 * @vif: virtual interface the rekeying was done on
4654 * @bssid: The BSSID of the AP, for checking association
4655 * @replay_ctr: the new replay counter after GTK rekeying
4656 * @gfp: allocation flags
4657 */
4658void ieee80211_gtk_rekey_notify(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *bssid,
4659 const u8 *replay_ctr, gfp_t gfp);
4660
Emmanuel Grumbach5d2cdcd2008-03-20 15:06:41 +02004661/**
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004662 * ieee80211_wake_queue - wake specific queue
4663 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4664 * @queue: queue number (counted from zero).
4665 *
4666 * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_wake_queue.
4667 */
4668void ieee80211_wake_queue(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int queue);
4669
4670/**
4671 * ieee80211_stop_queue - stop specific queue
4672 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4673 * @queue: queue number (counted from zero).
4674 *
4675 * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_stop_queue.
4676 */
4677void ieee80211_stop_queue(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int queue);
4678
4679/**
Tomas Winkler92ab8532008-07-24 21:02:04 +03004680 * ieee80211_queue_stopped - test status of the queue
4681 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4682 * @queue: queue number (counted from zero).
4683 *
4684 * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_stop_queue.
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004685 *
4686 * Return: %true if the queue is stopped. %false otherwise.
Tomas Winkler92ab8532008-07-24 21:02:04 +03004687 */
4688
4689int ieee80211_queue_stopped(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int queue);
4690
4691/**
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004692 * ieee80211_stop_queues - stop all queues
4693 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4694 *
4695 * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_stop_queue.
4696 */
4697void ieee80211_stop_queues(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4698
4699/**
4700 * ieee80211_wake_queues - wake all queues
4701 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4702 *
4703 * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_wake_queue.
4704 */
4705void ieee80211_wake_queues(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4706
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04004707/**
4708 * ieee80211_scan_completed - completed hardware scan
4709 *
4710 * When hardware scan offload is used (i.e. the hw_scan() callback is
4711 * assigned) this function needs to be called by the driver to notify
Johannes Berg8789d452010-08-26 13:30:26 +02004712 * mac80211 that the scan finished. This function can be called from
4713 * any context, including hardirq context.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04004714 *
4715 * @hw: the hardware that finished the scan
Avraham Stern7947d3e2016-07-05 15:23:12 +03004716 * @info: information about the completed scan
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04004717 */
Avraham Stern7947d3e2016-07-05 15:23:12 +03004718void ieee80211_scan_completed(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4719 struct cfg80211_scan_info *info);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004720
Johannes Bergdabeb342007-11-09 01:57:29 +01004721/**
Luciano Coelho79f460c2011-05-11 17:09:36 +03004722 * ieee80211_sched_scan_results - got results from scheduled scan
4723 *
4724 * When a scheduled scan is running, this function needs to be called by the
4725 * driver whenever there are new scan results available.
4726 *
4727 * @hw: the hardware that is performing scheduled scans
4728 */
4729void ieee80211_sched_scan_results(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4730
4731/**
4732 * ieee80211_sched_scan_stopped - inform that the scheduled scan has stopped
4733 *
4734 * When a scheduled scan is running, this function can be called by
4735 * the driver if it needs to stop the scan to perform another task.
4736 * Usual scenarios are drivers that cannot continue the scheduled scan
4737 * while associating, for instance.
4738 *
4739 * @hw: the hardware that is performing scheduled scans
4740 */
4741void ieee80211_sched_scan_stopped(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4742
4743/**
Johannes Berg8b2c9822012-11-06 20:23:30 +01004744 * enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags - interface iteration flags
4745 * @IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_NORMAL: Iterate over all interfaces that have
4746 * been added to the driver; However, note that during hardware
4747 * reconfiguration (after restart_hw) it will iterate over a new
4748 * interface and over all the existing interfaces even if they
4749 * haven't been re-added to the driver yet.
4750 * @IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_RESUME_ALL: During resume, iterate over all
4751 * interfaces, even if they haven't been re-added to the driver yet.
Arik Nemtsov3384d752015-03-01 09:10:15 +02004752 * @IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_ACTIVE: Iterate only active interfaces (netdev is up).
Johannes Berg8b2c9822012-11-06 20:23:30 +01004753 */
4754enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags {
4755 IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_NORMAL = 0,
4756 IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_RESUME_ALL = BIT(0),
Arik Nemtsov3384d752015-03-01 09:10:15 +02004757 IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_ACTIVE = BIT(1),
Johannes Berg8b2c9822012-11-06 20:23:30 +01004758};
4759
4760/**
Arik Nemtsov3384d752015-03-01 09:10:15 +02004761 * ieee80211_iterate_interfaces - iterate interfaces
4762 *
4763 * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given
4764 * hardware and calls the callback for them. This includes active as well as
4765 * inactive interfaces. This function allows the iterator function to sleep.
4766 * Will iterate over a new interface during add_interface().
4767 *
4768 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
4769 * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags
4770 * @iterator: the iterator function to call
4771 * @data: first argument of the iterator function
4772 */
4773void ieee80211_iterate_interfaces(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 iter_flags,
4774 void (*iterator)(void *data, u8 *mac,
4775 struct ieee80211_vif *vif),
4776 void *data);
4777
4778/**
Randy Dunlap6ef307b2008-07-03 13:52:18 -07004779 * ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces - iterate active interfaces
Johannes Bergdabeb342007-11-09 01:57:29 +01004780 *
4781 * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given
4782 * hardware that are currently active and calls the callback for them.
Ivo van Doorn2f561fe2008-05-10 13:40:49 +02004783 * This function allows the iterator function to sleep, when the iterator
4784 * function is atomic @ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_atomic can
4785 * be used.
Johannes Berg8b2c9822012-11-06 20:23:30 +01004786 * Does not iterate over a new interface during add_interface().
Johannes Bergdabeb342007-11-09 01:57:29 +01004787 *
4788 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
Johannes Berg8b2c9822012-11-06 20:23:30 +01004789 * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags
Ivo van Doorn2f561fe2008-05-10 13:40:49 +02004790 * @iterator: the iterator function to call
Johannes Bergdabeb342007-11-09 01:57:29 +01004791 * @data: first argument of the iterator function
4792 */
Arik Nemtsov3384d752015-03-01 09:10:15 +02004793static inline void
4794ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 iter_flags,
4795 void (*iterator)(void *data, u8 *mac,
4796 struct ieee80211_vif *vif),
4797 void *data)
4798{
4799 ieee80211_iterate_interfaces(hw,
4800 iter_flags | IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_ACTIVE,
4801 iterator, data);
4802}
Johannes Bergdabeb342007-11-09 01:57:29 +01004803
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004804/**
Ivo van Doorn2f561fe2008-05-10 13:40:49 +02004805 * ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_atomic - iterate active interfaces
4806 *
4807 * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given
4808 * hardware that are currently active and calls the callback for them.
4809 * This function requires the iterator callback function to be atomic,
4810 * if that is not desired, use @ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces instead.
Johannes Berg8b2c9822012-11-06 20:23:30 +01004811 * Does not iterate over a new interface during add_interface().
Ivo van Doorn2f561fe2008-05-10 13:40:49 +02004812 *
4813 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
Johannes Berg8b2c9822012-11-06 20:23:30 +01004814 * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags
Ivo van Doorn2f561fe2008-05-10 13:40:49 +02004815 * @iterator: the iterator function to call, cannot sleep
4816 * @data: first argument of the iterator function
4817 */
4818void ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_atomic(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berg8b2c9822012-11-06 20:23:30 +01004819 u32 iter_flags,
Ivo van Doorn2f561fe2008-05-10 13:40:49 +02004820 void (*iterator)(void *data,
4821 u8 *mac,
4822 struct ieee80211_vif *vif),
4823 void *data);
4824
4825/**
Johannes Bergc7c71062013-08-21 22:07:20 +02004826 * ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_rtnl - iterate active interfaces
4827 *
4828 * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given
4829 * hardware that are currently active and calls the callback for them.
4830 * This version can only be used while holding the RTNL.
4831 *
4832 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
4833 * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags
4834 * @iterator: the iterator function to call, cannot sleep
4835 * @data: first argument of the iterator function
4836 */
4837void ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_rtnl(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4838 u32 iter_flags,
4839 void (*iterator)(void *data,
4840 u8 *mac,
4841 struct ieee80211_vif *vif),
4842 void *data);
4843
4844/**
Arik Nemtsov0fc1e042014-10-22 12:30:59 +03004845 * ieee80211_iterate_stations_atomic - iterate stations
4846 *
4847 * This function iterates over all stations associated with a given
4848 * hardware that are currently uploaded to the driver and calls the callback
4849 * function for them.
4850 * This function requires the iterator callback function to be atomic,
4851 *
4852 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
4853 * @iterator: the iterator function to call, cannot sleep
4854 * @data: first argument of the iterator function
4855 */
4856void ieee80211_iterate_stations_atomic(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4857 void (*iterator)(void *data,
4858 struct ieee80211_sta *sta),
4859 void *data);
4860/**
Luis R. Rodriguez42935ec2009-07-29 20:08:07 -04004861 * ieee80211_queue_work - add work onto the mac80211 workqueue
4862 *
4863 * Drivers and mac80211 use this to add work onto the mac80211 workqueue.
4864 * This helper ensures drivers are not queueing work when they should not be.
4865 *
4866 * @hw: the hardware struct for the interface we are adding work for
4867 * @work: the work we want to add onto the mac80211 workqueue
4868 */
4869void ieee80211_queue_work(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct work_struct *work);
4870
4871/**
4872 * ieee80211_queue_delayed_work - add work onto the mac80211 workqueue
4873 *
4874 * Drivers and mac80211 use this to queue delayed work onto the mac80211
4875 * workqueue.
4876 *
4877 * @hw: the hardware struct for the interface we are adding work for
4878 * @dwork: delayable work to queue onto the mac80211 workqueue
4879 * @delay: number of jiffies to wait before queueing
4880 */
4881void ieee80211_queue_delayed_work(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4882 struct delayed_work *dwork,
4883 unsigned long delay);
4884
4885/**
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004886 * ieee80211_start_tx_ba_session - Start a tx Block Ack session.
Johannes Bergc951ad32009-11-16 12:00:38 +01004887 * @sta: the station for which to start a BA session
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004888 * @tid: the TID to BA on.
Sujith Manoharanbd2ce6e2010-12-15 07:47:10 +05304889 * @timeout: session timeout value (in TUs)
Randy Dunlapea2d8b52008-10-27 09:47:03 -07004890 *
4891 * Return: success if addBA request was sent, failure otherwise
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004892 *
4893 * Although mac80211/low level driver/user space application can estimate
4894 * the need to start aggregation on a certain RA/TID, the session level
4895 * will be managed by the mac80211.
4896 */
Sujith Manoharanbd2ce6e2010-12-15 07:47:10 +05304897int ieee80211_start_tx_ba_session(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u16 tid,
4898 u16 timeout);
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004899
4900/**
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004901 * ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe - low level driver ready to aggregate.
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01004902 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004903 * @ra: receiver address of the BA session recipient.
4904 * @tid: the TID to BA on.
4905 *
4906 * This function must be called by low level driver once it has
Johannes Berg5d22c892010-06-10 10:21:40 +02004907 * finished with preparations for the BA session. It can be called
4908 * from any context.
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004909 */
Johannes Bergc951ad32009-11-16 12:00:38 +01004910void ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *ra,
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004911 u16 tid);
4912
4913/**
4914 * ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_session - Stop a Block Ack session.
Johannes Bergc951ad32009-11-16 12:00:38 +01004915 * @sta: the station whose BA session to stop
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004916 * @tid: the TID to stop BA.
Randy Dunlapea2d8b52008-10-27 09:47:03 -07004917 *
Johannes Berg6a8579d2010-05-27 14:41:07 +02004918 * Return: negative error if the TID is invalid, or no aggregation active
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004919 *
4920 * Although mac80211/low level driver/user space application can estimate
4921 * the need to stop aggregation on a certain RA/TID, the session level
4922 * will be managed by the mac80211.
4923 */
Johannes Berg6a8579d2010-05-27 14:41:07 +02004924int ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_session(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u16 tid);
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004925
4926/**
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004927 * ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe - low level driver ready to stop aggregate.
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01004928 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004929 * @ra: receiver address of the BA session recipient.
4930 * @tid: the desired TID to BA on.
4931 *
4932 * This function must be called by low level driver once it has
Johannes Berg5d22c892010-06-10 10:21:40 +02004933 * finished with preparations for the BA session tear down. It
4934 * can be called from any context.
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004935 */
Johannes Bergc951ad32009-11-16 12:00:38 +01004936void ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *ra,
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004937 u16 tid);
4938
Mohamed Abbas84363e62008-04-04 16:59:58 -07004939/**
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02004940 * ieee80211_find_sta - find a station
4941 *
Johannes Berg5ed176e2009-11-04 14:42:28 +01004942 * @vif: virtual interface to look for station on
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02004943 * @addr: station's address
4944 *
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004945 * Return: The station, if found. %NULL otherwise.
4946 *
4947 * Note: This function must be called under RCU lock and the
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02004948 * resulting pointer is only valid under RCU lock as well.
4949 */
Johannes Berg5ed176e2009-11-04 14:42:28 +01004950struct ieee80211_sta *ieee80211_find_sta(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02004951 const u8 *addr);
4952
Kalle Valo04de8382009-03-22 21:57:35 +02004953/**
Ben Greear686b9cb2010-09-23 09:44:36 -07004954 * ieee80211_find_sta_by_ifaddr - find a station on hardware
Johannes Berg5ed176e2009-11-04 14:42:28 +01004955 *
4956 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
Ben Greear686b9cb2010-09-23 09:44:36 -07004957 * @addr: remote station's address
4958 * @localaddr: local address (vif->sdata->vif.addr). Use NULL for 'any'.
Johannes Berg5ed176e2009-11-04 14:42:28 +01004959 *
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004960 * Return: The station, if found. %NULL otherwise.
4961 *
4962 * Note: This function must be called under RCU lock and the
Johannes Berg5ed176e2009-11-04 14:42:28 +01004963 * resulting pointer is only valid under RCU lock as well.
4964 *
Ben Greear686b9cb2010-09-23 09:44:36 -07004965 * NOTE: You may pass NULL for localaddr, but then you will just get
4966 * the first STA that matches the remote address 'addr'.
4967 * We can have multiple STA associated with multiple
4968 * logical stations (e.g. consider a station connecting to another
4969 * BSSID on the same AP hardware without disconnecting first).
4970 * In this case, the result of this method with localaddr NULL
4971 * is not reliable.
Johannes Berg5ed176e2009-11-04 14:42:28 +01004972 *
Ben Greear686b9cb2010-09-23 09:44:36 -07004973 * DO NOT USE THIS FUNCTION with localaddr NULL if at all possible.
Johannes Berg5ed176e2009-11-04 14:42:28 +01004974 */
Ben Greear686b9cb2010-09-23 09:44:36 -07004975struct ieee80211_sta *ieee80211_find_sta_by_ifaddr(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4976 const u8 *addr,
4977 const u8 *localaddr);
Johannes Berg5ed176e2009-11-04 14:42:28 +01004978
4979/**
Johannes Bergaf818582009-11-06 11:35:50 +01004980 * ieee80211_sta_block_awake - block station from waking up
4981 * @hw: the hardware
4982 * @pubsta: the station
4983 * @block: whether to block or unblock
4984 *
4985 * Some devices require that all frames that are on the queues
4986 * for a specific station that went to sleep are flushed before
4987 * a poll response or frames after the station woke up can be
4988 * delivered to that it. Note that such frames must be rejected
4989 * by the driver as filtered, with the appropriate status flag.
4990 *
4991 * This function allows implementing this mode in a race-free
4992 * manner.
4993 *
4994 * To do this, a driver must keep track of the number of frames
4995 * still enqueued for a specific station. If this number is not
4996 * zero when the station goes to sleep, the driver must call
4997 * this function to force mac80211 to consider the station to
4998 * be asleep regardless of the station's actual state. Once the
4999 * number of outstanding frames reaches zero, the driver must
5000 * call this function again to unblock the station. That will
5001 * cause mac80211 to be able to send ps-poll responses, and if
5002 * the station queried in the meantime then frames will also
5003 * be sent out as a result of this. Additionally, the driver
5004 * will be notified that the station woke up some time after
5005 * it is unblocked, regardless of whether the station actually
5006 * woke up while blocked or not.
5007 */
5008void ieee80211_sta_block_awake(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5009 struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, bool block);
5010
5011/**
Johannes Berg37fbd902011-09-29 16:04:39 +02005012 * ieee80211_sta_eosp - notify mac80211 about end of SP
5013 * @pubsta: the station
5014 *
5015 * When a device transmits frames in a way that it can't tell
5016 * mac80211 in the TX status about the EOSP, it must clear the
5017 * %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP bit and call this function instead.
5018 * This applies for PS-Poll as well as uAPSD.
5019 *
Johannes Berge9437892013-02-15 21:38:08 +01005020 * Note that just like with _tx_status() and _rx() drivers must
5021 * not mix calls to irqsafe/non-irqsafe versions, this function
5022 * must not be mixed with those either. Use the all irqsafe, or
5023 * all non-irqsafe, don't mix!
5024 *
5025 * NB: the _irqsafe version of this function doesn't exist, no
5026 * driver needs it right now. Don't call this function if
5027 * you'd need the _irqsafe version, look at the git history
5028 * and restore the _irqsafe version!
Johannes Berg37fbd902011-09-29 16:04:39 +02005029 */
Johannes Berge9437892013-02-15 21:38:08 +01005030void ieee80211_sta_eosp(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta);
Johannes Berg37fbd902011-09-29 16:04:39 +02005031
5032/**
Emmanuel Grumbach0ead2512015-11-17 10:24:36 +02005033 * ieee80211_send_eosp_nullfunc - ask mac80211 to send NDP with EOSP
5034 * @pubsta: the station
5035 * @tid: the tid of the NDP
5036 *
5037 * Sometimes the device understands that it needs to close
5038 * the Service Period unexpectedly. This can happen when
5039 * sending frames that are filling holes in the BA window.
5040 * In this case, the device can ask mac80211 to send a
5041 * Nullfunc frame with EOSP set. When that happens, the
5042 * driver must have called ieee80211_sta_set_buffered() to
5043 * let mac80211 know that there are no buffered frames any
5044 * more, otherwise mac80211 will get the more_data bit wrong.
5045 * The low level driver must have made sure that the frame
5046 * will be sent despite the station being in power-save.
5047 * Mac80211 won't call allow_buffered_frames().
5048 * Note that calling this function, doesn't exempt the driver
5049 * from closing the EOSP properly, it will still have to call
5050 * ieee80211_sta_eosp when the NDP is sent.
5051 */
5052void ieee80211_send_eosp_nullfunc(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, int tid);
5053
5054/**
Johannes Berg830af022011-07-05 16:35:39 +02005055 * ieee80211_iter_keys - iterate keys programmed into the device
5056 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5057 * @vif: virtual interface to iterate, may be %NULL for all
5058 * @iter: iterator function that will be called for each key
5059 * @iter_data: custom data to pass to the iterator function
5060 *
5061 * This function can be used to iterate all the keys known to
5062 * mac80211, even those that weren't previously programmed into
5063 * the device. This is intended for use in WoWLAN if the device
5064 * needs reprogramming of the keys during suspend. Note that due
5065 * to locking reasons, it is also only safe to call this at few
5066 * spots since it must hold the RTNL and be able to sleep.
Johannes Bergf850e002011-07-13 19:50:53 +02005067 *
5068 * The order in which the keys are iterated matches the order
5069 * in which they were originally installed and handed to the
5070 * set_key callback.
Johannes Berg830af022011-07-05 16:35:39 +02005071 */
5072void ieee80211_iter_keys(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5073 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5074 void (*iter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5075 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5076 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
5077 struct ieee80211_key_conf *key,
5078 void *data),
5079 void *iter_data);
5080
5081/**
Eliad Pelleref044762015-11-17 10:24:37 +02005082 * ieee80211_iter_keys_rcu - iterate keys programmed into the device
5083 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5084 * @vif: virtual interface to iterate, may be %NULL for all
5085 * @iter: iterator function that will be called for each key
5086 * @iter_data: custom data to pass to the iterator function
5087 *
5088 * This function can be used to iterate all the keys known to
5089 * mac80211, even those that weren't previously programmed into
5090 * the device. Note that due to locking reasons, keys of station
5091 * in removal process will be skipped.
5092 *
5093 * This function requires being called in an RCU critical section,
5094 * and thus iter must be atomic.
5095 */
5096void ieee80211_iter_keys_rcu(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5097 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5098 void (*iter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5099 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5100 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
5101 struct ieee80211_key_conf *key,
5102 void *data),
5103 void *iter_data);
5104
5105/**
Johannes Berg3448c002012-09-11 17:57:42 +02005106 * ieee80211_iter_chan_contexts_atomic - iterate channel contexts
5107 * @hw: pointre obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5108 * @iter: iterator function
5109 * @iter_data: data passed to iterator function
5110 *
5111 * Iterate all active channel contexts. This function is atomic and
5112 * doesn't acquire any locks internally that might be held in other
5113 * places while calling into the driver.
5114 *
5115 * The iterator will not find a context that's being added (during
5116 * the driver callback to add it) but will find it while it's being
5117 * removed.
Johannes Berg8a61af62012-12-13 17:42:30 +01005118 *
5119 * Note that during hardware restart, all contexts that existed
5120 * before the restart are considered already present so will be
5121 * found while iterating, whether they've been re-added already
5122 * or not.
Johannes Berg3448c002012-09-11 17:57:42 +02005123 */
5124void ieee80211_iter_chan_contexts_atomic(
5125 struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5126 void (*iter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5127 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *chanctx_conf,
5128 void *data),
5129 void *iter_data);
5130
5131/**
Juuso Oikarinena619a4c2010-11-11 08:50:18 +02005132 * ieee80211_ap_probereq_get - retrieve a Probe Request template
5133 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5134 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5135 *
5136 * Creates a Probe Request template which can, for example, be uploaded to
5137 * hardware. The template is filled with bssid, ssid and supported rate
5138 * information. This function must only be called from within the
5139 * .bss_info_changed callback function and only in managed mode. The function
5140 * is only useful when the interface is associated, otherwise it will return
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01005141 * %NULL.
5142 *
5143 * Return: The Probe Request template. %NULL on error.
Juuso Oikarinena619a4c2010-11-11 08:50:18 +02005144 */
5145struct sk_buff *ieee80211_ap_probereq_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5146 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
5147
5148/**
Kalle Valo04de8382009-03-22 21:57:35 +02005149 * ieee80211_beacon_loss - inform hardware does not receive beacons
5150 *
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01005151 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Kalle Valo04de8382009-03-22 21:57:35 +02005152 *
Johannes Bergc1288b12012-01-19 09:29:57 +01005153 * When beacon filtering is enabled with %IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER and
Juuso Oikarinen1e4dcd02010-03-19 07:14:53 +02005154 * %IEEE80211_CONF_PS is set, the driver needs to inform whenever the
Kalle Valo04de8382009-03-22 21:57:35 +02005155 * hardware is not receiving beacons with this function.
5156 */
5157void ieee80211_beacon_loss(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005158
Juuso Oikarinen1e4dcd02010-03-19 07:14:53 +02005159/**
5160 * ieee80211_connection_loss - inform hardware has lost connection to the AP
5161 *
5162 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5163 *
Johannes Bergc1288b12012-01-19 09:29:57 +01005164 * When beacon filtering is enabled with %IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER, and
Juuso Oikarinen1e4dcd02010-03-19 07:14:53 +02005165 * %IEEE80211_CONF_PS and %IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR are set, the driver
5166 * needs to inform if the connection to the AP has been lost.
Johannes Berg682bd382013-01-29 13:13:50 +01005167 * The function may also be called if the connection needs to be terminated
5168 * for some other reason, even if %IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR isn't set.
Juuso Oikarinen1e4dcd02010-03-19 07:14:53 +02005169 *
5170 * This function will cause immediate change to disassociated state,
5171 * without connection recovery attempts.
5172 */
5173void ieee80211_connection_loss(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
5174
Juuso Oikarinena97c13c2010-03-23 09:02:34 +02005175/**
Johannes Berg95acac62011-07-12 12:30:59 +02005176 * ieee80211_resume_disconnect - disconnect from AP after resume
5177 *
5178 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5179 *
5180 * Instructs mac80211 to disconnect from the AP after resume.
5181 * Drivers can use this after WoWLAN if they know that the
5182 * connection cannot be kept up, for example because keys were
5183 * used while the device was asleep but the replay counters or
5184 * similar cannot be retrieved from the device during resume.
5185 *
5186 * Note that due to implementation issues, if the driver uses
5187 * the reconfiguration functionality during resume the interface
5188 * will still be added as associated first during resume and then
5189 * disconnect normally later.
5190 *
5191 * This function can only be called from the resume callback and
5192 * the driver must not be holding any of its own locks while it
5193 * calls this function, or at least not any locks it needs in the
5194 * key configuration paths (if it supports HW crypto).
5195 */
5196void ieee80211_resume_disconnect(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
5197
5198/**
Juuso Oikarinena97c13c2010-03-23 09:02:34 +02005199 * ieee80211_cqm_rssi_notify - inform a configured connection quality monitoring
5200 * rssi threshold triggered
5201 *
5202 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5203 * @rssi_event: the RSSI trigger event type
5204 * @gfp: context flags
5205 *
Johannes Bergea086352012-01-19 09:29:58 +01005206 * When the %IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_CQM_RSSI is set, and a connection quality
Juuso Oikarinena97c13c2010-03-23 09:02:34 +02005207 * monitoring is configured with an rssi threshold, the driver will inform
5208 * whenever the rssi level reaches the threshold.
5209 */
5210void ieee80211_cqm_rssi_notify(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5211 enum nl80211_cqm_rssi_threshold_event rssi_event,
5212 gfp_t gfp);
5213
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02005214/**
Johannes Berg98f03342014-11-26 12:42:02 +01005215 * ieee80211_cqm_beacon_loss_notify - inform CQM of beacon loss
5216 *
5217 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5218 * @gfp: context flags
5219 */
5220void ieee80211_cqm_beacon_loss_notify(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, gfp_t gfp);
5221
5222/**
Simon Wunderlich164eb022013-02-08 18:16:20 +01005223 * ieee80211_radar_detected - inform that a radar was detected
5224 *
5225 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5226 */
5227void ieee80211_radar_detected(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
5228
5229/**
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02005230 * ieee80211_chswitch_done - Complete channel switch process
5231 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5232 * @success: make the channel switch successful or not
5233 *
5234 * Complete the channel switch post-process: set the new operational channel
5235 * and wake up the suspended queues.
5236 */
5237void ieee80211_chswitch_done(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, bool success);
5238
Johannes Bergd1f5b7a2010-08-05 17:05:55 +02005239/**
5240 * ieee80211_request_smps - request SM PS transition
5241 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Johannes Berg633dd1e2010-08-18 15:01:23 +02005242 * @smps_mode: new SM PS mode
Johannes Bergd1f5b7a2010-08-05 17:05:55 +02005243 *
5244 * This allows the driver to request an SM PS transition in managed
5245 * mode. This is useful when the driver has more information than
5246 * the stack about possible interference, for example by bluetooth.
5247 */
5248void ieee80211_request_smps(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5249 enum ieee80211_smps_mode smps_mode);
5250
Johannes Berge31b8212010-10-05 19:39:30 +02005251/**
Johannes Berg21f83582010-12-18 17:20:47 +01005252 * ieee80211_ready_on_channel - notification of remain-on-channel start
5253 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5254 */
5255void ieee80211_ready_on_channel(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
5256
5257/**
5258 * ieee80211_remain_on_channel_expired - remain_on_channel duration expired
5259 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5260 */
5261void ieee80211_remain_on_channel_expired(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
5262
Shahar Levif41ccd72011-05-22 16:10:21 +03005263/**
5264 * ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session - callback to stop existing BA sessions
5265 *
5266 * in order not to harm the system performance and user experience, the device
5267 * may request not to allow any rx ba session and tear down existing rx ba
5268 * sessions based on system constraints such as periodic BT activity that needs
5269 * to limit wlan activity (eg.sco or a2dp)."
5270 * in such cases, the intention is to limit the duration of the rx ppdu and
5271 * therefore prevent the peer device to use a-mpdu aggregation.
5272 *
5273 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5274 * @ba_rx_bitmap: Bit map of open rx ba per tid
5275 * @addr: & to bssid mac address
5276 */
5277void ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u16 ba_rx_bitmap,
5278 const u8 *addr);
5279
Felix Fietkau8c771242011-08-20 15:53:55 +02005280/**
Sara Sharon06470f72016-01-28 16:19:25 +02005281 * ieee80211_mark_rx_ba_filtered_frames - move RX BA window and mark filtered
5282 * @pubsta: station struct
5283 * @tid: the session's TID
5284 * @ssn: starting sequence number of the bitmap, all frames before this are
5285 * assumed to be out of the window after the call
5286 * @filtered: bitmap of filtered frames, BIT(0) is the @ssn entry etc.
5287 * @received_mpdus: number of received mpdus in firmware
5288 *
5289 * This function moves the BA window and releases all frames before @ssn, and
5290 * marks frames marked in the bitmap as having been filtered. Afterwards, it
5291 * checks if any frames in the window starting from @ssn can now be released
5292 * (in case they were only waiting for frames that were filtered.)
5293 */
5294void ieee80211_mark_rx_ba_filtered_frames(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, u8 tid,
5295 u16 ssn, u64 filtered,
5296 u16 received_mpdus);
5297
5298/**
Felix Fietkau8c771242011-08-20 15:53:55 +02005299 * ieee80211_send_bar - send a BlockAckReq frame
5300 *
5301 * can be used to flush pending frames from the peer's aggregation reorder
5302 * buffer.
5303 *
5304 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5305 * @ra: the peer's destination address
5306 * @tid: the TID of the aggregation session
5307 * @ssn: the new starting sequence number for the receiver
5308 */
5309void ieee80211_send_bar(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u8 *ra, u16 tid, u16 ssn);
5310
Michal Kazior08cf42e2014-07-16 12:12:15 +02005311/**
5312 * ieee80211_start_rx_ba_session_offl - start a Rx BA session
5313 *
5314 * Some device drivers may offload part of the Rx aggregation flow including
5315 * AddBa/DelBa negotiation but may otherwise be incapable of full Rx
5316 * reordering.
5317 *
5318 * Create structures responsible for reordering so device drivers may call here
5319 * when they complete AddBa negotiation.
5320 *
5321 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
5322 * @addr: station mac address
5323 * @tid: the rx tid
5324 */
5325void ieee80211_start_rx_ba_session_offl(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5326 const u8 *addr, u16 tid);
5327
5328/**
5329 * ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session_offl - stop a Rx BA session
5330 *
5331 * Some device drivers may offload part of the Rx aggregation flow including
5332 * AddBa/DelBa negotiation but may otherwise be incapable of full Rx
5333 * reordering.
5334 *
5335 * Destroy structures responsible for reordering so device drivers may call here
5336 * when they complete DelBa negotiation.
5337 *
5338 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
5339 * @addr: station mac address
5340 * @tid: the rx tid
5341 */
5342void ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session_offl(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5343 const u8 *addr, u16 tid);
5344
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005345/* Rate control API */
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02005346
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005347/**
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02005348 * struct ieee80211_tx_rate_control - rate control information for/from RC algo
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005349 *
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02005350 * @hw: The hardware the algorithm is invoked for.
5351 * @sband: The band this frame is being transmitted on.
5352 * @bss_conf: the current BSS configuration
Simon Wunderlichf44d4eb2012-03-07 21:31:13 +01005353 * @skb: the skb that will be transmitted, the control information in it needs
5354 * to be filled in
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02005355 * @reported_rate: The rate control algorithm can fill this in to indicate
5356 * which rate should be reported to userspace as the current rate and
5357 * used for rate calculations in the mesh network.
5358 * @rts: whether RTS will be used for this frame because it is longer than the
5359 * RTS threshold
5360 * @short_preamble: whether mac80211 will request short-preamble transmission
5361 * if the selected rate supports it
Simon Wunderlichf44d4eb2012-03-07 21:31:13 +01005362 * @max_rate_idx: user-requested maximum (legacy) rate
Jouni Malinen37eb0b12010-01-06 13:09:08 +02005363 * (deprecated; this will be removed once drivers get updated to use
5364 * rate_idx_mask)
Simon Wunderlichf44d4eb2012-03-07 21:31:13 +01005365 * @rate_idx_mask: user-requested (legacy) rate mask
Felix Fietkau2ffbe6d2013-04-16 13:38:42 +02005366 * @rate_idx_mcs_mask: user-requested MCS rate mask (NULL if not in use)
Felix Fietkau8f0729b2010-11-11 15:07:23 +01005367 * @bss: whether this frame is sent out in AP or IBSS mode
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005368 */
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02005369struct ieee80211_tx_rate_control {
5370 struct ieee80211_hw *hw;
5371 struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband;
5372 struct ieee80211_bss_conf *bss_conf;
5373 struct sk_buff *skb;
5374 struct ieee80211_tx_rate reported_rate;
5375 bool rts, short_preamble;
5376 u8 max_rate_idx;
Jouni Malinen37eb0b12010-01-06 13:09:08 +02005377 u32 rate_idx_mask;
Felix Fietkau2ffbe6d2013-04-16 13:38:42 +02005378 u8 *rate_idx_mcs_mask;
Felix Fietkau8f0729b2010-11-11 15:07:23 +01005379 bool bss;
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005380};
5381
5382struct rate_control_ops {
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005383 const char *name;
5384 void *(*alloc)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct dentry *debugfsdir);
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005385 void (*free)(void *priv);
5386
5387 void *(*alloc_sta)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_sta *sta, gfp_t gfp);
5388 void (*rate_init)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
Simon Wunderlich3de805c2013-07-08 16:55:50 +02005389 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef,
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005390 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta);
Sujith81cb7622009-02-12 11:38:37 +05305391 void (*rate_update)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
Simon Wunderlich3de805c2013-07-08 16:55:50 +02005392 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef,
Johannes Berg64f68e52012-03-28 10:58:37 +02005393 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta,
5394 u32 changed);
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005395 void (*free_sta)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
5396 void *priv_sta);
5397
Felix Fietkauf6845652014-11-19 20:08:08 +01005398 void (*tx_status_noskb)(void *priv,
5399 struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
5400 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta,
5401 struct ieee80211_tx_info *info);
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005402 void (*tx_status)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
5403 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta,
5404 struct sk_buff *skb);
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02005405 void (*get_rate)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta,
5406 struct ieee80211_tx_rate_control *txrc);
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005407
5408 void (*add_sta_debugfs)(void *priv, void *priv_sta,
5409 struct dentry *dir);
5410 void (*remove_sta_debugfs)(void *priv, void *priv_sta);
Antonio Quartullicca674d2014-05-19 21:53:20 +02005411
5412 u32 (*get_expected_throughput)(void *priv_sta);
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005413};
5414
5415static inline int rate_supported(struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
Johannes Berg57fbcce2016-04-12 15:56:15 +02005416 enum nl80211_band band,
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005417 int index)
5418{
5419 return (sta == NULL || sta->supp_rates[band] & BIT(index));
5420}
5421
Luis R. Rodriguez4c6d4f52009-07-16 10:05:41 -07005422/**
5423 * rate_control_send_low - helper for drivers for management/no-ack frames
5424 *
5425 * Rate control algorithms that agree to use the lowest rate to
5426 * send management frames and NO_ACK data with the respective hw
5427 * retries should use this in the beginning of their mac80211 get_rate
5428 * callback. If true is returned the rate control can simply return.
5429 * If false is returned we guarantee that sta and sta and priv_sta is
5430 * not null.
5431 *
5432 * Rate control algorithms wishing to do more intelligent selection of
5433 * rate for multicast/broadcast frames may choose to not use this.
5434 *
5435 * @sta: &struct ieee80211_sta pointer to the target destination. Note
5436 * that this may be null.
5437 * @priv_sta: private rate control structure. This may be null.
5438 * @txrc: rate control information we sholud populate for mac80211.
5439 */
5440bool rate_control_send_low(struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
5441 void *priv_sta,
5442 struct ieee80211_tx_rate_control *txrc);
5443
5444
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005445static inline s8
5446rate_lowest_index(struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
5447 struct ieee80211_sta *sta)
5448{
5449 int i;
5450
5451 for (i = 0; i < sband->n_bitrates; i++)
5452 if (rate_supported(sta, sband->band, i))
5453 return i;
5454
5455 /* warn when we cannot find a rate. */
Johannes Berg54d50262011-11-04 18:07:43 +01005456 WARN_ON_ONCE(1);
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005457
Johannes Berg54d50262011-11-04 18:07:43 +01005458 /* and return 0 (the lowest index) */
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005459 return 0;
5460}
5461
Luis R. Rodriguezb770b432009-07-16 10:15:09 -07005462static inline
5463bool rate_usable_index_exists(struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
5464 struct ieee80211_sta *sta)
5465{
5466 unsigned int i;
5467
5468 for (i = 0; i < sband->n_bitrates; i++)
5469 if (rate_supported(sta, sband->band, i))
5470 return true;
5471 return false;
5472}
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005473
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +02005474/**
5475 * rate_control_set_rates - pass the sta rate selection to mac80211/driver
5476 *
5477 * When not doing a rate control probe to test rates, rate control should pass
5478 * its rate selection to mac80211. If the driver supports receiving a station
5479 * rate table, it will use it to ensure that frames are always sent based on
5480 * the most recent rate control module decision.
5481 *
5482 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5483 * @pubsta: &struct ieee80211_sta pointer to the target destination.
5484 * @rates: new tx rate set to be used for this station.
5485 */
5486int rate_control_set_rates(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5487 struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta,
5488 struct ieee80211_sta_rates *rates);
5489
Johannes Berg631ad702014-01-20 23:29:34 +01005490int ieee80211_rate_control_register(const struct rate_control_ops *ops);
5491void ieee80211_rate_control_unregister(const struct rate_control_ops *ops);
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005492
Luis R. Rodriguez10c806b2008-12-23 15:58:36 -08005493static inline bool
5494conf_is_ht20(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
5495{
Karl Beldan675a0b02013-03-25 16:26:57 +01005496 return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_20;
Luis R. Rodriguez10c806b2008-12-23 15:58:36 -08005497}
5498
5499static inline bool
5500conf_is_ht40_minus(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
5501{
Karl Beldan675a0b02013-03-25 16:26:57 +01005502 return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_40 &&
5503 conf->chandef.center_freq1 < conf->chandef.chan->center_freq;
Luis R. Rodriguez10c806b2008-12-23 15:58:36 -08005504}
5505
5506static inline bool
5507conf_is_ht40_plus(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
5508{
Karl Beldan675a0b02013-03-25 16:26:57 +01005509 return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_40 &&
5510 conf->chandef.center_freq1 > conf->chandef.chan->center_freq;
Luis R. Rodriguez10c806b2008-12-23 15:58:36 -08005511}
5512
5513static inline bool
5514conf_is_ht40(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
5515{
Karl Beldan675a0b02013-03-25 16:26:57 +01005516 return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_40;
Luis R. Rodriguez10c806b2008-12-23 15:58:36 -08005517}
5518
5519static inline bool
5520conf_is_ht(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
5521{
Rostislav Lisovy041f6072014-04-02 15:31:55 +02005522 return (conf->chandef.width != NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_5) &&
5523 (conf->chandef.width != NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_10) &&
5524 (conf->chandef.width != NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_20_NOHT);
Luis R. Rodriguez10c806b2008-12-23 15:58:36 -08005525}
5526
Johannes Berg2ca27bc2010-09-16 14:58:23 +02005527static inline enum nl80211_iftype
5528ieee80211_iftype_p2p(enum nl80211_iftype type, bool p2p)
5529{
5530 if (p2p) {
5531 switch (type) {
5532 case NL80211_IFTYPE_STATION:
5533 return NL80211_IFTYPE_P2P_CLIENT;
5534 case NL80211_IFTYPE_AP:
5535 return NL80211_IFTYPE_P2P_GO;
5536 default:
5537 break;
5538 }
5539 }
5540 return type;
5541}
5542
5543static inline enum nl80211_iftype
5544ieee80211_vif_type_p2p(struct ieee80211_vif *vif)
5545{
5546 return ieee80211_iftype_p2p(vif->type, vif->p2p);
5547}
5548
Sara Sharon65554d02016-02-16 12:48:17 +02005549/**
5550 * ieee80211_update_mu_groups - set the VHT MU-MIMO groud data
5551 *
5552 * @vif: the specified virtual interface
5553 * @membership: 64 bits array - a bit is set if station is member of the group
5554 * @position: 2 bits per group id indicating the position in the group
5555 *
5556 * Note: This function assumes that the given vif is valid and the position and
5557 * membership data is of the correct size and are in the same byte order as the
5558 * matching GroupId management frame.
5559 * Calls to this function need to be serialized with RX path.
5560 */
5561void ieee80211_update_mu_groups(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5562 const u8 *membership, const u8 *position);
5563
Meenakshi Venkataraman615f7b92011-07-08 08:46:22 -07005564void ieee80211_enable_rssi_reports(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5565 int rssi_min_thold,
5566 int rssi_max_thold);
5567
5568void ieee80211_disable_rssi_reports(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Arik Nemtsov768db342011-09-28 14:12:51 +03005569
Wey-Yi Guy0d8a0a12012-04-20 11:57:00 -07005570/**
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01005571 * ieee80211_ave_rssi - report the average RSSI for the specified interface
Wey-Yi Guy0d8a0a12012-04-20 11:57:00 -07005572 *
5573 * @vif: the specified virtual interface
5574 *
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01005575 * Note: This function assumes that the given vif is valid.
5576 *
5577 * Return: The average RSSI value for the requested interface, or 0 if not
5578 * applicable.
Wey-Yi Guy0d8a0a12012-04-20 11:57:00 -07005579 */
Wey-Yi Guy1dae27f2012-04-13 12:02:57 -07005580int ieee80211_ave_rssi(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
5581
Johannes Bergcd8f7cb2013-01-22 12:34:29 +01005582/**
5583 * ieee80211_report_wowlan_wakeup - report WoWLAN wakeup
5584 * @vif: virtual interface
5585 * @wakeup: wakeup reason(s)
5586 * @gfp: allocation flags
5587 *
5588 * See cfg80211_report_wowlan_wakeup().
5589 */
5590void ieee80211_report_wowlan_wakeup(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5591 struct cfg80211_wowlan_wakeup *wakeup,
5592 gfp_t gfp);
5593
Felix Fietkau06be6b12013-10-14 18:01:00 +02005594/**
5595 * ieee80211_tx_prepare_skb - prepare an 802.11 skb for transmission
5596 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5597 * @vif: virtual interface
5598 * @skb: frame to be sent from within the driver
5599 * @band: the band to transmit on
5600 * @sta: optional pointer to get the station to send the frame to
5601 *
5602 * Note: must be called under RCU lock
5603 */
5604bool ieee80211_tx_prepare_skb(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5605 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, struct sk_buff *skb,
5606 int band, struct ieee80211_sta **sta);
5607
Felix Fietkaua7022e62013-12-16 21:49:14 +01005608/**
5609 * struct ieee80211_noa_data - holds temporary data for tracking P2P NoA state
5610 *
5611 * @next_tsf: TSF timestamp of the next absent state change
5612 * @has_next_tsf: next absent state change event pending
5613 *
5614 * @absent: descriptor bitmask, set if GO is currently absent
5615 *
5616 * private:
5617 *
5618 * @count: count fields from the NoA descriptors
5619 * @desc: adjusted data from the NoA
5620 */
5621struct ieee80211_noa_data {
5622 u32 next_tsf;
5623 bool has_next_tsf;
5624
5625 u8 absent;
5626
5627 u8 count[IEEE80211_P2P_NOA_DESC_MAX];
5628 struct {
5629 u32 start;
5630 u32 duration;
5631 u32 interval;
5632 } desc[IEEE80211_P2P_NOA_DESC_MAX];
5633};
5634
5635/**
5636 * ieee80211_parse_p2p_noa - initialize NoA tracking data from P2P IE
5637 *
5638 * @attr: P2P NoA IE
5639 * @data: NoA tracking data
5640 * @tsf: current TSF timestamp
5641 *
5642 * Return: number of successfully parsed descriptors
5643 */
5644int ieee80211_parse_p2p_noa(const struct ieee80211_p2p_noa_attr *attr,
5645 struct ieee80211_noa_data *data, u32 tsf);
5646
5647/**
5648 * ieee80211_update_p2p_noa - get next pending P2P GO absent state change
5649 *
5650 * @data: NoA tracking data
5651 * @tsf: current TSF timestamp
5652 */
5653void ieee80211_update_p2p_noa(struct ieee80211_noa_data *data, u32 tsf);
5654
Arik Nemtsovc887f0d32014-06-11 17:18:25 +03005655/**
5656 * ieee80211_tdls_oper - request userspace to perform a TDLS operation
5657 * @vif: virtual interface
5658 * @peer: the peer's destination address
5659 * @oper: the requested TDLS operation
5660 * @reason_code: reason code for the operation, valid for TDLS teardown
5661 * @gfp: allocation flags
5662 *
5663 * See cfg80211_tdls_oper_request().
5664 */
5665void ieee80211_tdls_oper_request(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *peer,
5666 enum nl80211_tdls_operation oper,
5667 u16 reason_code, gfp_t gfp);
Andrei Otcheretianskia7f3a762014-10-22 15:22:49 +03005668
5669/**
Liad Kaufmanb6da9112014-11-19 13:47:38 +02005670 * ieee80211_reserve_tid - request to reserve a specific TID
5671 *
5672 * There is sometimes a need (such as in TDLS) for blocking the driver from
5673 * using a specific TID so that the FW can use it for certain operations such
5674 * as sending PTI requests. To make sure that the driver doesn't use that TID,
5675 * this function must be called as it flushes out packets on this TID and marks
5676 * it as blocked, so that any transmit for the station on this TID will be
5677 * redirected to the alternative TID in the same AC.
5678 *
5679 * Note that this function blocks and may call back into the driver, so it
5680 * should be called without driver locks held. Also note this function should
5681 * only be called from the driver's @sta_state callback.
5682 *
5683 * @sta: the station to reserve the TID for
5684 * @tid: the TID to reserve
5685 *
5686 * Returns: 0 on success, else on failure
5687 */
5688int ieee80211_reserve_tid(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 tid);
5689
5690/**
5691 * ieee80211_unreserve_tid - request to unreserve a specific TID
5692 *
5693 * Once there is no longer any need for reserving a certain TID, this function
5694 * should be called, and no longer will packets have their TID modified for
5695 * preventing use of this TID in the driver.
5696 *
5697 * Note that this function blocks and acquires a lock, so it should be called
5698 * without driver locks held. Also note this function should only be called
5699 * from the driver's @sta_state callback.
5700 *
5701 * @sta: the station
5702 * @tid: the TID to unreserve
5703 */
5704void ieee80211_unreserve_tid(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 tid);
5705
5706/**
Felix Fietkauba8c3d62015-03-27 21:30:37 +01005707 * ieee80211_tx_dequeue - dequeue a packet from a software tx queue
5708 *
5709 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5710 * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface
5711 *
5712 * Returns the skb if successful, %NULL if no frame was available.
5713 */
5714struct sk_buff *ieee80211_tx_dequeue(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5715 struct ieee80211_txq *txq);
Michal Kaziorf2ac7e32016-01-27 15:26:12 +01005716
5717/**
5718 * ieee80211_txq_get_depth - get pending frame/byte count of given txq
5719 *
5720 * The values are not guaranteed to be coherent with regard to each other, i.e.
5721 * txq state can change half-way of this function and the caller may end up
5722 * with "new" frame_cnt and "old" byte_cnt or vice-versa.
5723 *
5724 * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface
5725 * @frame_cnt: pointer to store frame count
5726 * @byte_cnt: pointer to store byte count
5727 */
5728void ieee80211_txq_get_depth(struct ieee80211_txq *txq,
5729 unsigned long *frame_cnt,
5730 unsigned long *byte_cnt);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07005731#endif /* MAC80211_H */